US20230247776A1 - Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same - Google Patents

Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230247776A1
US20230247776A1 US18/297,582 US202318297582A US2023247776A1 US 20230247776 A1 US20230247776 A1 US 20230247776A1 US 202318297582 A US202318297582 A US 202318297582A US 2023247776 A1 US2023247776 A1 US 2023247776A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
jig
unit
cover window
panel member
display panel
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/297,582
Inventor
Kyung-su Lee
Kwan-young Han
Jong-Hwan Kim
Yong-Youl CHO
Young-Sik Kim
Yang-Han Son
Dae-Hyun Hwang
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Display Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Display Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=48771287&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20230247776(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Samsung Display Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Display Co Ltd
Priority to US18/297,582 priority Critical patent/US20230247776A1/en
Assigned to SAMSUNG DISPLAY CO., LTD. reassignment SAMSUNG DISPLAY CO., LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHO, YONG-YOUL, HAN, KWAN-YOUNG, HWANG, DAE-HYUN, KIM, JONG-HWAN, KIM, YOUNG-SIK, LEE, KYUNG-SU, SON, YANG-HAN
Publication of US20230247776A1 publication Critical patent/US20230247776A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K5/00Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
    • H05K5/0017Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus with operator interface units
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B3/00Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
    • B32B3/02Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by features of form at particular places, e.g. in edge regions
    • B32B3/04Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by features of form at particular places, e.g. in edge regions characterised by at least one layer folded at the edge, e.g. over another layer ; characterised by at least one layer enveloping or enclosing a material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B3/00Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
    • B32B3/26Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
    • B32B3/28Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer comprising a deformed thin sheet, i.e. the layer having its entire thickness deformed out of the plane, e.g. corrugated, crumpled
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/0046Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by constructional aspects of the apparatus
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/14Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers
    • B32B37/16Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers with all layers existing as coherent layers before laminating
    • B32B37/18Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers with all layers existing as coherent layers before laminating involving the assembly of discrete sheets or panels only
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/30Partial laminating
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B38/00Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
    • B32B38/18Handling of layers or the laminate
    • B32B38/1825Handling of layers or the laminate characterised by the control or constructional features of devices for tensioning, stretching or registration
    • B32B38/1833Positioning, e.g. registration or centering
    • B32B38/1841Positioning, e.g. registration or centering during laying up
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B38/00Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
    • B32B38/18Handling of layers or the laminate
    • B32B38/1866Handling of layers or the laminate conforming the layers or laminate to a convex or concave profile
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/04Interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/12Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133305Flexible substrates, e.g. plastics, organic film
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G02F1/133331Cover glasses
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1601Constructional details related to the housing of computer displays, e.g. of CRT monitors, of flat displays
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/301Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements flexible foldable or roll-able electronic displays, e.g. thin LCD, OLED
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/0202Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
    • H04M1/026Details of the structure or mounting of specific components
    • H04M1/0266Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a display module assembly
    • H04M1/0268Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a display module assembly including a flexible display panel
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K5/00Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
    • H05K5/02Details
    • H05K5/0217Mechanical details of casings
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H10K50/80Constructional details
    • H10K50/84Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
    • H10K50/841Self-supporting sealing arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/80Constructional details
    • H10K59/87Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
    • H10K59/871Self-supporting sealing arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • H10K77/111Flexible substrates
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2307/00Properties of the layers or laminate
    • B32B2307/40Properties of the layers or laminate having particular optical properties
    • B32B2307/412Transparent
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • B32B2457/206Organic displays, e.g. OLED
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • B32B2457/208Touch screens
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K2102/00Constructional details relating to the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K2102/301Details of OLEDs
    • H10K2102/311Flexible OLED
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50Photovoltaic [PV] energy
    • Y02E10/549Organic PV cells
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P70/00Climate change mitigation technologies in the production process for final industrial or consumer products
    • Y02P70/50Manufacturing or production processes characterised by the final manufactured product
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T156/00Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
    • Y10T156/10Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T156/00Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
    • Y10T156/10Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor
    • Y10T156/1002Methods of surface bonding and/or assembly therefor with permanent bending or reshaping or surface deformation of self sustaining lamina
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T156/00Adhesive bonding and miscellaneous chemical manufacture
    • Y10T156/17Surface bonding means and/or assemblymeans with work feeding or handling means
    • Y10T156/1702For plural parts or plural areas of single part
    • Y10T156/1744Means bringing discrete articles into assembled relationship
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/24Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
    • Y10T428/24628Nonplanar uniform thickness material
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T428/00Stock material or miscellaneous articles
    • Y10T428/24Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
    • Y10T428/24628Nonplanar uniform thickness material
    • Y10T428/24653Differential nonplanarity at margin

Definitions

  • aspects of embodiments of the present invention relate to a display device, and a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
  • Portable electronic devices based on portability are widely used.
  • Portable electronic devices that have recently been widely used include small electronic devices such as mobile phones as well as tablet personal computers (PCs).
  • portable electronic devices include a display device for providing visual information such as an image to a user.
  • display devices such as flexible display devices
  • a set angle for example, a predetermined angle
  • flexible display devices that may bend at a set angle may be manufactured using a flexible process, such as being flexibly manufactured. Since a flexible display device may be formed of a flexible material, the flexible display device may have any of various shapes.
  • a flexible display device may be manufactured by forming a light-emitting unit on a substrate to form a display unit, and sealing the display unit by using an encapsulation unit, which may increase a lifetime of the display unit.
  • the substrate may be formed of a flexible material, and the encapsulation unit may be formed, for example, as a substrate or a thin film.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide for a display device having a curved shape (for example, having an arc shape or a degree of curvature) that may enable efficient mass production, high reliability, and high quality. Further embodiments provide for a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
  • a display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window.
  • the panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
  • the display device may further include an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
  • the cover window may further include a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
  • the panel member may be laminated entirely on the flat portion.
  • the curved portion may include a plurality of curved portions.
  • the panel member may include a first panel portion laminated on the flat portion, and a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and laminated on the curved portion.
  • the cover window may have a curved surface having a curvature radius.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
  • the panel member may be formed on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • TSP touch screen panel
  • the panel member may be flexible.
  • a method of manufacturing a display device includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • At least a portion of the panel member may contact a surface of the second jig.
  • the panel member may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
  • the panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
  • the panel member may be flat during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
  • the laminating of the cover window to the panel member may include partially curving the panel member by the moving of the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the first one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first other one of the first jig or the second jig, or the first other one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from a second other one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the second other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the mounting of the panel member may include fixing the panel member to the second jig.
  • the panel member may be flexible.
  • Outer surfaces of the cover window and the first jig may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • the panel member may be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • TSP touch screen panel
  • an apparatus for manufacturing a display device includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit connected to a first one of the first jig or the second jig and configured to move the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the first jig may further include a first fixing unit for fixing the cover window to the mount surface.
  • the second jig may further include a second fixing unit for fixing the panel member to the surface conforming to the mount surface.
  • the first fixing unit or the second fixing unit may include an absorption unit, and an absorption pump for evacuating air from the absorption unit.
  • the apparatus may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the cushion unit may include a plurality of cushion units at respective ends of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • a distance between the cushion units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member.
  • a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • the panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • the panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • TSP touch screen panel
  • the apparatus may further include a clamping unit spaced from the second jig and configured to support the panel member.
  • the clamping unit may include a plurality of clamping units.
  • a distance between the clamping units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member when the clamping units support the panel member.
  • the apparatus may further include a linear driving unit coupled to the clamping unit and configured to linearly move the clamping unit.
  • the linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a same direction as a moving direction of the second jig.
  • the linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a diagonal direction of a moving direction of the second jig.
  • At least one of the first jig or the second jig may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • a second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • the other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
  • a curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • the panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • the panel member may include least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • TSP touch screen panel
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel of the display device of FIG. 1 ;
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIGS. 4 A through 4 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIGS. 7 A through 7 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 9 A through 9 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. Expressions such as “at least one of,” when preceding a list of elements, modify the entire list of elements and do not modify the individual elements of the list. As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” and/or “including,” when used herein, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. It will be understood that, although the terms first, second, third, etc., may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another element.
  • examples of display devices include various display devices.
  • examples of display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic light-emitting display devices.
  • the display devices are organic light-emitting display devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel 130 of the display device 100 of FIG. 1 .
  • the display device 100 includes a cover window 110 , a panel member (for example, display panel 130 ), and an adhesive layer 120 .
  • the cover window 110 is partially curved. That is, the cover window 110 has a flat portion 111 (on which the display panel 130 is laminated, with the adhesive layer 120 therebetween) and at least one end of the flat portion 111 is curved (e.g., a curved portion 112 ). As shown in FIG. 1 , both ends of the flat portion 111 are curved (e.g., two curved portions 112 ). As depicted, the cover window 110 includes the flat portion 111 and curved portions 112 that extend from the flat portion 111 . The curved portions 112 are formed on both ends of the flat portion 111 .
  • the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 130 or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • the panel member may include only the display panel 130 and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
  • the panel member may include only the TSP and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
  • the panel member may include the display panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
  • the panel member may include the display panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to the cover window 110 .
  • the panel member includes only the display panel 130 .
  • the display panel 130 may be flexible.
  • the display panel 130 may be formed such that a size of the display panel 130 is different from a size of the cover window 110 . As shown, the display panel 130 is smaller than the cover window 110 .
  • the display panel 130 is shorter in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 110 (due to the inward curvature of the cover window 110 ). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display panel 130 is shorter in width than the cover window 110 as described below in further detail.
  • the display panel 130 may be laminated entirely on the flat portion 111 (and not on any of the curved portions 112 ).
  • the display panel 130 includes a first substrate S and a light-emitting unit.
  • the display panel 130 may include an encapsulation unit B formed on the light-emitting unit.
  • the encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film.
  • the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate instead of or in addition to a thin film. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the encapsulation unit B is formed as a thin film.
  • the light-emitting unit is formed on the first substrate S.
  • the light-emitting unit includes a thin film transistor (TFT, in this case a driving TFT), a passivation film 131 formed to cover the TFT, and an organic light-emitting device, such as an organic light emitting diode (OLED) 138 formed on the passivation film 131 .
  • the first substrate S may be formed of a glass material, but the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the first substrate S may be formed of a plastic material or a metal material such as steel use stainless (SUS, or stainless steel) or titanium (Ti). In another embodiment, the first substrate S may include polyimide (PI). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first substrate S is formed of PI.
  • a buffer layer 132 formed of an organic compound and/or an inorganic compound such as SiOx (x ⁇ 1) or SiNx (x ⁇ 1) is formed on a top surface of the first substrate S.
  • An active layer 133 having a set pattern (for example, a predetermined pattern) is formed on the buffer layer 132 , and then is covered by a gate insulating layer 134 .
  • the active layer 133 includes a source region 133 a and a drain region 133 c , and a channel region 133 b located between the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c .
  • the active layer 133 may be formed by forming an amorphous silicon film on the buffer layer 132 , crystallizing the amorphous silicon film to form a polycrystalline silicon film, and patterning the polycrystalline silicon film.
  • the source and drain regions 133 a and 133 c of the active layer 133 are doped with impurities according to a type of the TFT such as a driving TFT (for example, driving TFT in FIG. 2 ) or a switching TFT.
  • a gate electrode 135 corresponding to the channel region 113 b of the active layer 133 and an interlayer insulating layer 136 covering the gate electrode 135 are formed on a top surface of the gate insulating layer 134 .
  • contact holes for example, via-hole H1
  • a source electrode 137 a and a drain electrode 137 b are formed on the interlayer insulating layer 136 to respectively contact the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c.
  • a reflective film is formed at the same time (for example, in the same layer) as the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b are formed as described above. Accordingly, each of the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a material having high electrical conductivity and having a thickness great enough to reflect light.
  • Each of the source/drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a metal material such as silver (Ag), magnesium (Mg), aluminum (Al), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), gold (Au), nickel (Ni), neodymium (Nd), iridium (Ir), chromium (Cr), lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), or a compound or alloy thereof.
  • a metal material such as silver (Ag), magnesium (Mg), aluminum (Al), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), gold (Au), nickel (Ni), neodymium (Nd), iridium (Ir), chromium (Cr), lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), or a compound or alloy thereof.
  • the passivation film 131 is formed on the TFT. Then a pixel electrode 138 a of the OLED 138 is formed on the passivation film 131 .
  • the pixel electrode 138 a contacts the drain electrode 137 b of the TFT through a via-hole H2 formed in the passivation film 131 .
  • the passivation film 131 may be formed of an inorganic material and/or an organic material and have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. As shown in FIG. 2 , the passivation film 131 is formed as a planarization film having a flat top surface regardless of any roughness or irregularities of a bottom surface.
  • the passivation film 131 may be formed of a transparent insulating material to achieve a resonance effect.
  • a pixel-defining film 139 is formed of an organic material and/or an inorganic material to cover the pixel electrode 138 a and the passivation film 131 , and is opened to expose the pixel electrode 138 a .
  • An organic light-emitting layer 138 b and a counter electrode 138 c are formed on at least the pixel electrode 138 a .
  • the pixel electrode 138 a functions as an anode and the counter electrode 138 c functions as a cathode, or vice versa.
  • the pixel electrode 138 a may be formed of a material having a high work function, such as indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), In 2 O 3 , or ZnO.
  • the counter electrode 138 c may be formed of a metal material having a low work function such as Ag, Mg, Al, Pt, Pd, Au, Ni, Nd, Ir, Cr, Li, Ca, or a compound or alloy thereof.
  • the counter electrode 138 c may be formed of Mg, Ag, or Al to have a small thickness to function as a semi-transmissive reflective film. Accordingly, the counter electrode 138 c may optically resonate to transmit light.
  • the pixel electrode 138 a and the counter electrode 138 c are insulated from each other by the organic light-emitting layer 138 b , and apply voltages of different polarities to the organic light-emitting layer 138 b for the organic light-emitting layer 138 b to emit light.
  • the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may be formed of a low molecular weight organic material or a high molecular weight organic material.
  • the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may have a single-layer or multi-layer structure formed by stacking a hole injection layer (HIL), a hole transport layer (HTL), an emission layer (EML), an electron transport layer (ETL), and an electron injection layer (EIL).
  • HIL hole injection layer
  • HTL hole transport layer
  • EML emission layer
  • ETL electron transport layer
  • EIL electron injection layer
  • the low molecular weight organic material include copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), N,N′-Di(naphthalene-1-yl)-N,N′-diphenyl-benzidine (NPB), and tris-8-hydroxyquinoline aluminum (Alq3).
  • the low molecular weight organic material is formed by using vacuum deposition.
  • the HIL, the HTL, the ETL, and the EIL may be commonly applied to red, green, and blue pixels. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the common layers may cover all pixels, like the counter electrode 138 c.
  • the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may have a structure including an HTL and an EML.
  • the HTL may be formed of poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) (PEDOT) and the EML may be formed of a high molecular weight organic material based on polyphenylene vinylene (PPV) or polyfluorene.
  • the high molecular weight organic material may be formed by using screen printing or inkjet printing.
  • the organic light-emitting layer 138 b is not limited thereto, and various examples may be formed, applied, deposited, etc., as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film as described above.
  • the encapsulation unit B may be formed by alternately stacking at least one organic layer and at least one inorganic layer.
  • a plurality of inorganic layers or a plurality of organic layers may be provided.
  • the organic layer may be formed of a polymer, and may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure formed of one or more selected from the group including polyethylene terephthalate, polyimide, polycarbonate, epoxy, polyethylene, and polyacrylate.
  • the organic layer may be formed of polyacrylate.
  • the organic layer may be formed by polymerizing a monomer composition including a diacrylate-based monomer and a triacrylate-based monomer. A monoacrylate-based monomer may be further included in the monomer composition.
  • a well-known photoinitiator such as TPO may be further included in the monomer composition, but other embodiments of the present embodiment are not necessarily limited thereto.
  • the inorganic layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure including a metal oxide or a metal nitride.
  • the inorganic layer may include one or more selected from the group including SiNx, Al 2 O 3 , SiO 2 , and TiO 2 .
  • an uppermost layer of the encapsulation unit B that is exposed to the outside may be an inorganic layer to reduce or prevent moisture from penetrating into the organic light-emitting device.
  • the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one organic layer is inserted between at least two inorganic layers. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one inorganic layer is inserted between at least two organic layers.
  • the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, and a second inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the display unit.
  • the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, and a third inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
  • the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, a third inorganic layer, a third organic layer, and a fourth inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
  • a halogenated metal layer including LiF may be further disposed between the light-emitting unit and the first inorganic layer.
  • the halogenated metal layer may reduce or prevent the light-emitting unit from being damaged when the first inorganic layer is formed by using sputtering or plasma deposition.
  • the first organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the third inorganic layer.
  • the first organic layer may be completely covered by the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may be completely covered by the third inorganic layer.
  • the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate as described above.
  • the second substrate may be formed similarly to the first substrate S.
  • the second substrate may be formed of a glass material, but like the first substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the second substrate may be formed of a different material, such as a plastic material.
  • the display device 100 may include a touch panel formed on the display panel 130 as described above.
  • the touch panel may be located between the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120 .
  • the touch panel may be a panel positioned on the display panel 130 .
  • the touch panel may be formed on the encapsulation unit B.
  • the touch panel may be formed on the cover window 110 to have a panel shape or to have a pattern.
  • a method of forming a touch panel is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, a detailed description thereof will not be given. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a touch panel is not formed on the display panel 130 .
  • the display device 100 includes the adhesive layer 120 that is located between the display panel 130 and the cover window 110 .
  • the adhesive layer 120 may be variously formed.
  • the adhesive layer 120 may include an adhesive film such as an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
  • OCA optical clear adhesive
  • the adhesive layer 120 may have the same size as the display panel 130 . In other embodiments, the adhesive layer 120 may be smaller than the display panel 130 .
  • the adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130 to laminate the display panel 130 to the cover window 110 . For example, the adhesive layer 120 may be applied to the encapsulation unit B.
  • the display device 100 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 100 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 3 through 4 C .
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 200 for manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 4 A through 4 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the same elements as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • the apparatus 200 includes a first jig 210 that is partially curved and has a mount surface 211 that conforms to one surface of the cover window 110 .
  • the first jig 210 has a shape similar to that of the cover window 110 . That is, the mount surface 211 of the first jig 210 is curved.
  • the mount surface 211 has a flat portion on which the flat portion 111 of the cover window is mounted and the mount surface 211 has curved portions on which the curved portions 112 of the cover window are mounted.
  • the mount surface 211 may be formed by being recessed in the first jig 210 .
  • the apparatus 200 includes a second jig 220 that detachably couples to the first jig 210 .
  • One surface of the second jig 220 conforms to the mount surface 211 .
  • one surface of the second jig 220 is curved in places to conform to the portions of the mount surface 211 that are curved, and is flat in places to conform to the portion of the mount surface 211 that is flat. That is, the second jig 220 is curved such that the second jig 220 protrudes toward the first jig 210 .
  • the display panel 130 is mounted on the flat surface of the second jig 220 .
  • At least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of an elastic material. In addition, at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of a hard material.
  • the elastic material may be a soft material having an elastic force such as silicon, rubber, or a soft synthetic resin.
  • the hard material may be a material having a high hardness such as reinforced plastic or a metal.
  • first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may be selected in various ways.
  • the first jig 210 may be formed of a metal and the second jig 220 may be formed of silicon.
  • the first jig 210 may be formed of rubber and the second jig 220 may be formed of plastic.
  • both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 are formed of hard materials.
  • the apparatus 200 may include a driving unit (such as second driving unit 225 ) that is connected to at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 , and that moves the corresponding at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
  • the driving unit may include a first driving unit that moves the first jig 210 and the second driving unit 225 that moves the second jig 220 .
  • the first driving unit and the second driving unit 225 may be formed similarly. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the second driving unit 225 is provided.
  • the second driving unit 225 may include any of various devices.
  • the second driving unit 225 may include a cylinder that operates by air pressure or oil pressure to move the second jig 220 .
  • the second driving unit 225 may include a motor that operates by electricity to move the second jig 220 .
  • the second driving unit 225 includes a cylinder.
  • the apparatus 200 includes a fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240 ) that prevents or helps prevent the cover window 110 mounted on the first jig 210 from moving, or that prevents or helps prevent the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120 mounted on the second jig 220 from separating from the second jig 220 .
  • the fixing unit includes an absorption unit (for example, second absorption unit 241 ) that is formed on at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
  • the fixing unit includes an absorption pump (for example, second absorption pump 242 ) that absorbs (for example, vacuums or evacuates) air from the absorption unit.
  • the absorption pump may be provided outside a chamber C as described below.
  • the fixing unit is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may be formed in other various ways as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the fixing unit may be a separate frame that is formed on the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 .
  • the fixing unit may be an adhesive member having an adhesive force.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit that is provided on the first jig 210 , and includes a second fixing unit 240 that is provided on the second jig 220 .
  • the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may be formed similarly.
  • the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 , respectively, by using air.
  • the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 , respectively, by using a separate frame.
  • the apparatus 200 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 200 may accurately laminate the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 100 by using the apparatus 200 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 4 A through 4 C .
  • the cover window 110 is first fabricated.
  • the cover window 110 may include any of various materials.
  • the cover window 110 may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material.
  • the cover window 110 is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may include any material as long as the cover window 110 is partially curved or capable of being partially curved.
  • the cover window 110 After the cover window 110 is fabricated, it may be flat, in which case the curved portions 112 may be formed by bending both ends of the cover window 110 .
  • the curved portions 112 may be bent from the flat portion 111 .
  • the curved portions 112 extend from the flat portion 111 as described above, and each has an arc shape having a set radius (for example, a predetermined radius) or degree of curvature.
  • each of the curved portions 112 may have, for example, an oval shape instead of the arc shape.
  • the display panel 130 may be manufactured before, during, or after the cover window 110 is manufactured.
  • a method of manufacturing the display panel 130 may be substantially the same as a method of manufacturing a general display panel (as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art) and thus, a further detailed description thereof will not be given.
  • the adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130 .
  • the adhesive layer 120 may be attached to the encapsulation unit B (or other second substrate) as described above with reference to FIG. 2 .
  • the adhesive layer 120 may, for example, be attached as a film to the encapsulation unit B, or be applied as a material to the encapsulation unit B.
  • it will be assumed that the adhesive layer 120 is formed as a film.
  • the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are respectively mounted on the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 . That is, the cover window 110 is mounted on the first jig 210 , and the display panel 130 is mounted on the second jig 220 .
  • the first jig 210 may be below the second jig 220 (for example, in a gravity direction).
  • the distance between the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 is decreased.
  • the first jig 210 may move toward the second jig 220 , or the second jig 220 may move toward the first jig 210 .
  • both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may move closer to each other.
  • One surface of the first jig 210 is curved to conform (for example, closely attach) to one surface of the cover window 110 .
  • the surface of the first jig 210 is curved by being recessed.
  • the display panel 130 is mounted on one surface of the second jig 220 .
  • the second fixing unit 240 fixes the display panel 130 to the surface of the second jig 220 .
  • a second absorption unit 241 contacts, adheres, or is otherwise attached or fixed to one surface of the display panel 130 .
  • the second absorption unit 241 is partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220 .
  • the second absorption pump 242 absorbs air from the second absorption unit 241 (for example, by creating a partial vacuum or a pressure difference).
  • the second absorption unit 241 Since the display panel 130 closes (for example, occludes) all or a portion of the second absorption unit 241 , and air in the second absorption unit 241 is continuously absorbed (for example, vacuumed or evacuated), the second absorption unit 241 is in an almost vacuum state.
  • the second absorption pump 242 operates as described above, the display panel 130 attached to the second jig 220 is not separated from the second jig 220 due to the pressure difference.
  • a plurality of second absorption units 241 is provided.
  • the second absorption units 241 are exposed or partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220 as described above and are spaced apart from one another by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval, such as evenly spaced).
  • the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210 by driving the second driving unit 225 .
  • the second driving unit 225 may be programmed to operate for a set period of time (for example, a predetermined period of time). When the second driving unit 225 operates in this manner, the second jig 220 approaches the first jig 210 . When the second jig 220 is continuously moved toward the first jig 210 , the adhesive layer 120 contacts the cover window 110 .
  • sizes of the adhesive layer 120 and the display panel 130 may be the same as or less than a size of the flat portion 111 as described above. That is, the display panel 130 may be formed such that a width of the display panel 130 is less than a width of the cover window 110 , and the adhesive layer 120 may be formed such that a width of the adhesive layer 120 is less than the width of the display panel 130 . Accordingly, when the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210 , the adhesive layer 120 contacts one surface of the flat portion 111 . When the second driving unit 225 continuously operates, the adhesive layer 120 contacting the flat portion 111 is compressed against the flat portion 111 . Thus, the display panel 130 and the cover window 110 may be attached to each other through lamination.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 compress the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be reduced, and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are attached to each other, the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the operation may be performed, for example in an atmospheric state or a vacuum state (such as a near vacuum state).
  • the apparatus 200 may include the first jig 210 , and the chamber C in which the second jig 220 is disposed.
  • the apparatus 200 may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure of the chamber C. When a pressure in the chamber C is maintained in a vacuum state, vapor formation between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 when the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are laminated may be effectively prevented.
  • the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized, and product quality may be improved.
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 includes a cover window 310 , a panel member 390 , and an adhesive layer 320 .
  • the cover window 310 includes a flat portion 311 and curved portions 312 .
  • the cover window 310 and the adhesive layer 320 are substantially the same as the cover window 110 and adhesive layer 120 of FIG. 1 and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the panel member 390 may include a first panel member 391 that is seated on the flat portion 311 .
  • the panel member 390 may include a second panel member 392 at least a portion of which is seated on the curved portions 312 .
  • the panel member 390 may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 includes the display panel 330 .
  • the display panel 330 includes a first display panel portion 331 that is laminated on the flat portion 311 .
  • the display panel 330 includes second display panel portions 332 that extend from the first display panel portion 331 and are laminated or partially laminated on the curved portions 312 .
  • the second display panel portions 332 extend in a curved shape from the first display panel portion 331 . Accordingly, since the display device 300 includes the cover window 310 that is curved and the display device 300 displays through a flat portion 311 and a curved portion 312 , a larger or maximum active area may be obtained.
  • the display panel 330 may be smaller in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 310 .
  • the display device 300 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the display panel 330 is shorter in width than the cover window 310 as described below in further detail.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7 C .
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 7 A through 7 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the same members as those of FIG. 5 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • the apparatus 400 includes a first jig 410 , a second jig 420 , a driving unit (such as first driving unit 415 ), and a fixing unit F (for example, first fixing unit 430 and second fixing unit 440 ).
  • the first jig 410 , the second jig 420 , the driving unit, and the fixing unit F are similar to the first jig 210 , the second jig 220 , the driving unit (for example, the second driving unit 225 ), and the fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240 ), respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit may include the first driving unit 415 and a second driving unit
  • the fixing unit F includes the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440 .
  • the first driving unit 415 , the second driving unit, the first fixing unit 430 , and the second fixing unit 440 are substantially the same as the first driving unit, the second driving unit 225 , the first fixing unit, and the second fixing unit 240 , respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. However, it will be assumed that the driving unit including only the first driving unit 415 operates.
  • the apparatus 400 may include a cushion unit 490 provided on or a part of at least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420 .
  • a thickness of the cushion unit 490 may be greater than or equal to 0.5 mm and less than or equal to 3 mm.
  • the cushion unit 490 is part of a surface of the second jig 420 .
  • a plurality of cushion units 490 are part of respective end portions of the second jig 420 to face the first jig 410 .
  • the cushion units 490 include a first cushion unit 491 and a second cushion unit 492 that are part of a surface of the second jig 420 and spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other.
  • the distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the display panel 330 .
  • the distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the width of the display panel 330 .
  • the cushion units 490 support the display panel 330 and help prevent air bubbles from being formed between the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 when the second jig 420 and the first jig 410 are moved toward each other with the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 , respectively, therebetween.
  • the apparatus 400 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 400 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the apparatus 400 (such as the second jig 420 ) includes the cushion unit 490 , a defect rate that may increase during lamination of the display panel 330 to the cover window 310 on the curved portions 312 may be reduced.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7 C .
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 400 is similar to that described above.
  • the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be manufactured as described above and may be mounted on the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 , respectively (see FIG. 7 A ).
  • the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440 respectively fix the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 .
  • a first absorption pump 432 operates, a first absorption unit 431 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state.
  • a second absorption pump 442 operates, a second absorption unit 441 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Accordingly, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are fixed to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 , respectively.
  • the first jig 410 is higher than the second jig 420 (for example, in a gravity direction). At least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420 then moves towards the other. For example, the first jig 410 may move toward the second jig 420 , or the second jig 420 may move toward the first jig 410 . In other embodiments, both the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420 . When the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420 , the first driving unit 415 operates. When the first driving unit 415 continuously operates, a curved surface of the cover window 310 contacts the adhesive layer 320 .
  • the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be flat against the second jig 420 . Then, when the adhesive layer 320 and the cover window 310 contact each other, both ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved (for example, through contact with the cover window 310 that is curved). Next, a first display panel portion 331 (that is flat) and second display panel portions 332 (that are curved) of the display panel 330 are formed. Accordingly, the first display panel portion 331 and the second display panel portions 332 are formed when the display panel 330 is adhered to the flat portion 311 and the curved portions 312 .
  • the cover window 310 may be attached to the display panel 330 through lamination as the first driving unit 415 operates as described above (see FIGS. 5 and 7 C ).
  • the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig 420 when the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are mounted on the second jig 420 .
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. In addition, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 9 A through 9 C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 includes a first jig 510 , a second jig 520 , a driving unit M (such as first driving unit 515 and second driving unit 525 ), and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 ).
  • the first jig 510 , the second jig 520 , the driving unit M, and the fixing unit are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 530 (including first absorption unit 531 and first absorption pump 532 ).
  • the first driving unit 515 , the second driving unit 525 , and the first fixing unit 530 are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 500 includes a clamping unit 550 that is spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the second jig 520 , and supports the display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied.
  • the clamping unit 550 may be spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the first jig 510 , and supports the cover window 310 .
  • a set interval for example, a predetermined interval
  • the clamping unit 550 supports one or more ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 when they are inserted into the clamping unit 550 .
  • a plurality of clamping units 550 are provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the panel member (for example, display panel 330 ) when the clamping units 550 are fixing the display panel 330 .
  • the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above.
  • each of the clamping units 550 is placed at both ends of the cover window 310 in the direction of the at least one of a width or a length of the cover window 310 .
  • a distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 is less than a width of the display panel 330 and the panel member includes the display panel 330 .
  • the clamping units 550 face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 , and fix respective ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 .
  • the clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 and a second clamping unit 552 that are spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other.
  • the apparatus 500 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 500 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the apparatus 500 includes the clamping unit 550 to accurately align the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 , working efficiency may be improved.
  • FIGS. 9 A through 9 C A method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9 A through 9 C .
  • the cover window 310 is formed, the display panel 330 is formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 is attached to the display panel 330 .
  • the cover window 310 may be mounted on the first jig 510 as described above (see FIG. 9 A ).
  • respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 .
  • the respective ends of the display panel 330 may be fixed by being inserted into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 .
  • middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). As shown in FIGS. 9 B and 9 C , since a distance S2 between the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330 , the middle portions of the display panel 330 protrude toward the first jig 510 .
  • the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are fixed, the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed by moving at least one of the first jig 510 or the second jig 520 .
  • the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 .
  • the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525 may operate to move the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 closer to each other.
  • the middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 (which are curved downward) then contact the cover window 310 .
  • the middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may first contact a portion of the flat portion 311 .
  • the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are adhered to the cover window 310 from the flat portion 311 as the first contacting portion to the curved portions 312 . That is, the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 contact in an order from the flat portion 311 to the curved portions 312 .
  • the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330 , the display panel 330 may detach from the clamping unit 550 , and the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 may move closer to each other to further laminate the display panel 330 to the cover window 310 .
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and equal or less than 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape.
  • the method may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 , a defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
  • a cover window that is partially curved and a display panel are rapidly and accurately laminated to each other, mass production, high reliability, and high quality may be achieved.
  • a display device since a display device may be manufactured rapidly, manufacturing time and costs may be reduced.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 includes a first jig 610 , a second jig 620 , a driving unit M (including first driving unit 615 and second driving unit 625 ), a clamping unit 650 , and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 ).
  • the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625
  • the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 630 .
  • the first driving unit 615 , the second driving unit 625 , and the first fixing unit 630 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first fixing unit 630 may include a first absorption unit 631 and a first absorption pump 632 .
  • the clamping unit 650 may include a first clamping unit 651 and a second clamping unit 652 .
  • the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 600 may include a first linear driving unit 660 and a second linear driving unit 670 which respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 (for example, in a vertical direction with respect to gravity).
  • the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may be formed similarly and thus, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first shaft 661 that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 and linearly moves.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first driving module 665 that drives the first shaft 661 .
  • the first driving module 665 may include, for example, a cylinder or a motor.
  • the first driving module 665 includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first elastic unit 663 that surrounds the first shaft 661 .
  • the first elastic unit 663 may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 when the first clamping unit 651 moves.
  • the cover window 310 and a panel member may be formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be formed on the panel member.
  • the panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330 . Respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
  • middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
  • a distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330 , the middle portions may protrude toward the first jig 610 . In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than a width of the display panel 330 .
  • the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 610 or the second jig 620 .
  • the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 .
  • first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
  • the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 moves.
  • the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be raised while maintaining their curved states.
  • a distance between the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
  • the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may lower the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 .
  • the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625 may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330 ).
  • the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another (e.g., starting with the flat portion 311 ).
  • a method of compressing the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be performed in the same manner as that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330 . In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 may include a first jig 710 , a second jig 720 (including a cushion unit 790 ), a driving unit M (including first driving unit 715 and second driving unit 725 ), a clamping unit 750 (including a first clamping unit 751 and a second clamping unit 752 ), a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 ), a first linear driving unit 760 , and a second linear driving unit 770 .
  • the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include the first driving unit 715 and the second driving unit 725
  • the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 730 .
  • the first driving unit 715 , the second driving unit 725 , and the first fixing unit 730 (which includes first absorption unit 731 and first absorption pump 732 ) may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 , respectively.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 in a diagonal direction, respectively, with respect to the second jig 720 (and, for example, with respect to a gravity direction). Since the second linear driving unit 770 may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 .
  • the first linear driving unit 760 may include a first shaft 761 , a first driving module 765 , and a first elastic unit 763 .
  • the first shaft 761 , the first driving module 765 , and the first elastic unit 763 may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 660 in FIGS. 10 - 11 ) except that, the first shaft 761 is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 with respect to the second jig 720 .
  • the first driving module 765 may vary a length of the first shaft 761 . Since the first driving module 765 and the first shaft 761 are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 as described above, the first clamping unit 751 may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 .
  • the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves.
  • the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves.
  • the first shaft 761 may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 operates.
  • the first shaft 761 may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first driving module 765 rotates.
  • the cushion unit 790 may be formed in various ways.
  • the cushion unit 790 may be part of an outer surface (e.g., a contacting surface, such as a surface that contacts the cover window 310 or the display panel 330 ) of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
  • the cushion unit 790 may be part of a portion of such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
  • the cushion unit 790 is part of the apparatus 700 and covers such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
  • the cushion unit 790 is part of an entire such outer surface of the second jig 720 .
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 may be similar to that described above.
  • a panel member for example, display panel 330
  • the cover window 310 may be prepared, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be applied to the panel member.
  • the panel member may include the display panel 330 and the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330 .
  • the display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 .
  • the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720 .
  • a method of compressing the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 may be similar to that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may also move.
  • the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 , respectively.
  • the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be raised diagonally with respect to the second jig 720 .
  • both ends of the display panel 330 may be released from the clamping unit 750 .
  • the display panel 330 may be laminated to the cover window 310 by the adhesive layer 320 beginning from a middle portion of the display panel 330 (corresponding to the flat portion 311 of the cover window 310 ).
  • the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 .
  • the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be lowered diagonally with respect to the second jig 720 . While the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 are lowered, the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may get closer to each other to compress the display panel 330 , the adhesive layer 320 , and the cover window 310 against one another. For example, the second jig 720 may contact the display panel 330 .
  • a method of adhering the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • the cushion unit 790 may spread a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 .
  • the cushion unit 790 may help prevent the display panel 330 or the cover window 310 from being damaged by partially absorbing a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 .
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 . Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved surface to the display panel 330 . In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 a according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 a may include a cover window 310 a and a panel member 390 a as described above.
  • the display device 300 a may include a first adhesive layer 320 a that is disposed between a panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
  • the panel member 390 a may include a display panel 330 a and a TSP 340 a as described above.
  • a second adhesive layer 350 a may be provided between the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a to attach the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 a is curved.
  • the cover window 310 may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R.
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed after the panel member 390 a is attached is convex.
  • the cover window 310 is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 a.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of the same material.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of a transparent material having an adhesive force.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may include an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
  • OCA optical clear adhesive
  • the display device 300 a since the display device 300 a is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 a may be provided on various members.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 a may include a first jig 410 a , a second jig 420 a , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 a ), and a cushion unit 490 a .
  • At least a portion of the first jig 410 a may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 a .
  • the first jig 410 a may have a curved surface on which the cover window 310 a having a curved surface with a set or predetermined curvature radius is seated.
  • the first jig 410 a may be recessed away from the second jig 420 a.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 a may protrude toward the first jig 410 a to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 a .
  • the outer surface of the second jig 420 a may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 a and a second driving unit 425 a .
  • the first driving unit 415 a may linearly move the first jig 410 a toward the second jig 420 a
  • the second driving unit 425 a may linearly move the second jig 420 a toward the first jig 410 a
  • the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 a provided on the first jig 410 a and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 a .
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 a .
  • the first fixing unit 430 a and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • the first fixing unit 430 a may be formed in various ways.
  • the first fixing unit 430 a may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
  • the first fixing unit 430 a may include a first absorption unit 431 a and a first absorption pump 432 a that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 a .
  • the first fixing unit 430 a is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 a and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 a .
  • the first fixing unit 430 a includes the first absorption unit 431 a and the first absorption pump 432 a.
  • the cushion unit 490 a may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a .
  • the cushion unit 490 a is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed explanation thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cushion unit 490 a is provided only on the second jig 420 a and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 a.
  • the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 a is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 a.
  • the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 410 a .
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 a .
  • the first absorption pump 432 a may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 a , so that the cover window 310 a may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 a.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a may be disposed on the second jig 420 a .
  • the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 420 a
  • the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 410 a.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 a.
  • the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a .
  • a protruding portion of the second jig 420 a may first contact the display panel 330 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a may be sequentially laminated from a central portion of the display panel 330 a to both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 490 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a , the TSP 340 a , and the display panel 330 a.
  • the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may operate to separate the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a .
  • An operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a.
  • the apparatus 400 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 a , the second jig 420 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 400 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
  • the apparatus 400 a may manufacture any type of display device 300 a .
  • the apparatus 400 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 a includes a first jig 510 a , a second jig 520 a , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 a ), and a cushion unit 590 a .
  • the first jig 510 a , the second jig 520 a , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 a are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 a and a second driving unit 525 a
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 a .
  • the first driving unit 515 a , the second driving unit 525 a , and the first fixing unit 530 a (which includes a first absorption unit 531 a and a first absorption pump 532 a ) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 500 a includes a clamping unit 550 a that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a , and supports the panel member 390 a .
  • the clamping unit 550 a is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 a.
  • the clamping unit 550 a may support one end of the panel member 390 a when the one end of the panel member 390 a is inserted into the clamping unit 550 a .
  • a plurality of the clamping units 550 a may be provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 a is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 a .
  • the panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a and the panel member 390 a includes the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 a face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 a , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a .
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 a include a first clamping unit 551 a and a second clamping unit 552 a that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 500 a may accurately attach the cover window 310 a having a curved surface to the panel member 390 a , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the apparatus 500 a since the apparatus 500 a includes the clamping unit 550 a to accurately align the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a , working efficiency may be improved.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 a by using the apparatus 500 a will now be described with reference to FIG. 16 .
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 a may be formed, and then the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a .
  • the cover window 310 a may be mounted on the first jig 510 a as described above.
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 a .
  • a first absorption pump 532 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 531 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 510 a.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 a .
  • the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 520 a
  • the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 510 a .
  • respective ends of the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a .
  • the respective ends of panel member 390 a may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a as described above.
  • portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
  • a distance between the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a , the portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may protrude toward the first jig 510 a.
  • the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , the first adhesive layer 320 a , and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a.
  • the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to move the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a closer to each other.
  • the upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a first contact the cover window 310 a .
  • the display panel 330 a , the second adhesive layer 350 a , the TSP 340 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be laminated to the cover window 310 a beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 a toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a do not move.
  • the cushion unit 590 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed and laminated.
  • the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to separate the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a.
  • the apparatus 500 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 a , the second jig 520 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 500 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 a includes a first jig 610 a , a second jig 620 a , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 a , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 a ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 a .
  • the first jig 610 a , the second jig 620 a , the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 a , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 a and a second driving unit 625 a
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 a .
  • the first driving unit 615 a , the second driving unit 625 a , and the first fixing unit 630 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first fixing unit 630 a may include a first absorption pump 632 a and a first absorption unit 631 a.
  • the clamping unit 650 a may include a first clamping unit 651 a and a second clamping unit 652 a .
  • the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 600 a may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 a and a second linear driving unit 670 a that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 a moves.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 a.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first shaft 661 a that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 a and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 a .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first driving module 665 a that drives the first shaft 661 a .
  • the first driving module 665 a may include a cylinder or a motor.
  • the first driving module 665 a includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 a includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 a rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first elastic unit 663 a that surrounds the first shaft 661 a .
  • the first elastic unit 663 a may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 a includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 a may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 a as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 a when the first clamping unit 651 a moves.
  • the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 610 a .
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 a .
  • a first absorption pump 632 a may absorb air of a first absorption unit 631 a to fix the cover window 310 a to the outer surface of the first jig 610 a.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 a .
  • the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 620 a and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 610 a .
  • the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 a and an end of the TSP 340 a may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed on the TSP 340 a . Respective ends of the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • one portion of the panel member 390 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
  • the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 a .
  • the distance between the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a.
  • the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a .
  • the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a.
  • first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a .
  • first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 a moves.
  • the panel member 390 a may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
  • a distance between the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
  • the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 a.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may lower the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 a may contact panel member 390 a ).
  • the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other.
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 690 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated due to compression.
  • the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may operate to separate the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a.
  • the apparatus 600 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 a , the second jig 620 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed.
  • the apparatus 600 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 600 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 a may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 a may include a first jig 710 a , a second jig 720 a , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 a , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 a ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 a .
  • the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 a and a second driving unit 725 a
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 a
  • the first driving unit 715 a , the second driving unit 725 a , and the first fixing unit 730 a (which includes first absorption unit 731 a and first absorption pump 732 a ) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 750 a may include a first clamping unit 751 a and a second clamping unit 752 a .
  • the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 a and a second linear driving unit 770 a , and the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a , respectively.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 a may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 a , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 a.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 a may include a first shaft 761 a , a first driving module 765 a , and a first elastic unit 763 a .
  • the first shaft 761 a , the first driving module 765 a , and the first elastic unit 763 a may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12 - 13 ).
  • the first shaft 761 a is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 a.
  • the first driving module 765 a may vary a length of the first shaft 761 a . Since the first driving module 765 a and the first shaft 761 a are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 a as described above, the first clamping unit 751 a may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 a.
  • the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
  • the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
  • the first shaft 761 a may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 a operates.
  • the first shaft 761 a may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first driving module 765 a rotates.
  • the cushion unit 790 a may be formed in various ways.
  • the cushion unit 790 a may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a .
  • the cushion unit 790 a is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 a.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 a may be similar to that described above.
  • the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 a may include the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 710 a .
  • the cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 a .
  • a first absorption pump 732 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 731 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 710 a.
  • the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a When the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a , and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a.
  • the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be disposed on the second jig 720 a .
  • the display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 720
  • the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 710 a .
  • the panel member 390 a manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a .
  • a distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 a
  • an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 a may protrude toward the first jig 710 a .
  • the distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a .
  • the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a .
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may also move.
  • the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a , respectively.
  • the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be raised diagonally.
  • both ends of the panel member 390 a may be released.
  • the panel member 390 a may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 a beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a .
  • the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be lowered diagonally.
  • first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a While the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a are lowered, the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
  • a method of adhering the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • the cushion unit 790 a may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a .
  • the cushion unit 790 a may help prevent the panel member 390 a or the cover window 310 a from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first driving unit 715 a and the second driving unit 725 a may operate to separate the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a.
  • the apparatus 700 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 a , the second jig 720 a , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 700 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 700 a may manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 a may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 b according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 b may include a cover window 310 b and a panel member 390 b as described above.
  • the display device 300 b may include a first adhesive layer 320 b that is disposed between the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
  • the panel member 390 b may include a display panel 330 b and a TSP 340 b as described above.
  • a second adhesive layer 350 b may be provided between the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b to attach the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • the cover window 310 b may be curved.
  • the cover window 310 b may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed is curved after then panel member 390 b is attached.
  • the cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius.
  • the cover window 310 b may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
  • the cover window 310 b may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 (e.g., there may be a separate curvature radius of each portion or curved surface of the cover window 310 b ).
  • N is a natural number
  • the cover window 310 b is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of the same material.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of an adhesive and transparent material.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may include an optical clear adhesive film (OCA film) or an adhesive material.
  • the display device 300 b since the display device 300 b is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 b may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 b may include a first jig 410 b , a second jig 420 b , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 b ), and a cushion unit 490 b .
  • An outer surface of the first jig 410 b on which the cover window 310 b is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 b contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 b .
  • the first jig 410 b may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 b .
  • the first jig 410 b may be formed by being recessed away from the second jig 420 b.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 b may protrude toward the first jig 410 b to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 b (e.g., the first jig 410 b may have a recessed outer surface).
  • the outer surface of the second jig 420 b may be at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 b and a second driving unit 425 b .
  • the first driving unit 415 b may linearly move the first jig 410 b toward the second jig 420 b
  • the second driving unit 425 b may linearly move the second jig 420 b toward the first jig 410 b
  • the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 b provided on the first jig 410 b and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 b .
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 b .
  • the first fixing unit 430 b and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • the first fixing unit 430 b may be formed in various ways.
  • the first fixing unit 430 b may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
  • the first fixing unit 430 b may include a first absorption unit 431 b and a first absorption pump 432 b that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 b .
  • the first fixing unit 430 b is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 b and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 b .
  • the first fixing unit 430 b includes the first absorption unit 431 b and the first absorption pump 432 b.
  • the cushion unit 490 b may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b .
  • the cushion unit 490 b is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cushion unit 490 b is provided only on the second jig 420 b and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 b.
  • the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 b is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the panel member 390 b may adhere the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b by using the second adhesive layer 350 b.
  • the cover window 310 b may be disposed on the first jig 410 b .
  • the cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 b .
  • the first absorption pump 432 b may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 b , so that the cover window 310 b may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 b.
  • the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b may be disposed on the second jig 420 b .
  • the display panel 330 b may be disposed to face the second jig 420 b
  • the TSP 340 b may be disposed to face the first jig 410 b.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 b.
  • the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b .
  • a protruding portion of the second jig 420 b may first contact the display panel 330 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 b to both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 490 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
  • the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may operate to separate the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 b from the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b.
  • the apparatus 400 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 b , the second jig 420 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 400 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 400 b may manufacture any type of display device 300 b .
  • the apparatus 400 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 b includes a first jig 510 b , a second jig 520 b , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 b ), and a cushion unit 590 b .
  • the first jig 510 b , the second jig 520 b , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 b are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 b and a second driving unit 525 b
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 b
  • the first driving unit 515 b , the second driving unit 525 b , and the first fixing unit 530 b (which includes a first absorption unit 531 b and a first absorption pump 532 b ) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 500 b includes a clamping unit 550 b that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b , and supports the panel member 390 b .
  • the clamping unit 550 b is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 b.
  • the clamping unit 550 b may support one end of the panel member 390 b when the one end of the panel member 390 b is inserted into the clamping unit 550 b .
  • a plurality of the clamping units 550 b may be provided, where a distance S4 between the clamping units 550 b is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 b .
  • the panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above.
  • the distance S4 between the plurality of clamping units 550 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b and the panel member 390 b includes the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 b face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 b , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b .
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 b include a first clamping unit 551 b and a second clamping unit 552 b that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 500 b may accurately attach the cover window 310 b having a curved surface to the panel member 390 b , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the apparatus 500 b since the apparatus 500 b includes the clamping unit 550 b to accurately align the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b , working efficiency may be improved.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 b by using the apparatus 500 b will now be described with reference to FIG. 21 .
  • the cover window 310 b may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 b may be formed, and then the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b .
  • the cover window 310 b may be mounted on the first jig 510 b as described above.
  • respective ends of the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b .
  • the respective ends of panel member 390 b may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b as described above.
  • portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
  • a distance S4 between the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b , the portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may protrude toward the first jig 510 b.
  • the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , the first adhesive layer 320 b , and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b.
  • the first driving unit 515 b and the second driving unit 525 b may operate to move the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b closer to each other.
  • the upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b first contact the cover window 310 b .
  • the display panel 330 b , the second adhesive layer 350 b , the TSP 340 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be laminated to the cover window 310 b beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 b toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 590 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed and laminated.
  • the apparatus 500 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 b , the second jig 520 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 500 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 b includes a first jig 610 b , a second jig 620 b , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 b , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 b ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 b .
  • the first jig 610 b , the second jig 620 b , the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 b , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 b and a second driving unit 625 b
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 b
  • the first driving unit 615 b , the second driving unit 625 b , and the first fixing unit 630 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first fixing unit 630 b may include a first absorption pump 632 b and a first absorption unit 631 b.
  • the clamping unit 650 b may include a first clamping unit 651 b and a second clamping unit 652 b .
  • the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 600 b may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 b and a second linear driving unit 670 b that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 b.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first shaft 661 b that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 b and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 b .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first driving module 665 b that drives the first shaft 661 b .
  • the first driving module 665 b may include a cylinder or a motor.
  • the first driving module 665 b includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 b includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 b rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first elastic unit 663 b that surrounds the first shaft 661 b .
  • the first elastic unit 663 b may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 b includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 b may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 b as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 b when the first clamping unit 651 b moves.
  • the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 b , and then the first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed on the TSP 340 b . Respective ends of the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
  • one portion of the panel member 390 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction).
  • a distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b
  • the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 b .
  • the distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b.
  • the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 b or the second jig 620 b .
  • the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b.
  • first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b .
  • first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 b moves.
  • the panel member 390 b may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
  • a distance between the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance)
  • the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 b.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may lower the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
  • the first driving unit 615 b and the second driving unit 625 b may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 b may contact panel member 390 b ).
  • the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other.
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 690 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated due to compression.
  • the apparatus 600 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 b , the second jig 620 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed.
  • the apparatus 600 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 600 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 b may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 b may include a first jig 710 b , a second jig 720 b , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 b , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 b ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 b .
  • the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 b and a second driving unit 725 b
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 b
  • the first driving unit 715 b , the second driving unit 725 b , and the first fixing unit 730 b (which includes first absorption unit 731 b and first absorption pump 732 b ) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 750 b may include a first clamping unit 751 b and a second clamping unit 752 b .
  • the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 b and a second linear driving unit 770 b , and the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b , respectively.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 b may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 b , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 b.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 b may include a first shaft 761 b , a first driving module 765 b , and a first elastic unit 763 b .
  • the first shaft 761 b , the first driving module 765 b , and the first elastic unit 763 b may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12 - 13 ).
  • the first shaft 761 b is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 b.
  • the first driving module 765 b may vary a length of the first shaft 761 b . Since the first driving module 765 b and the first shaft 761 b are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 b as described above, the first clamping unit 751 b may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 b.
  • the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
  • the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
  • the first shaft 761 b may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 b operates.
  • the first shaft 761 b may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first driving module 765 b rotates.
  • the cushion unit 790 b may be formed in various ways.
  • the cushion unit 790 b may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b .
  • the cushion unit 790 b is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 b.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 b may be similar to that described above.
  • the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 b may include the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b , and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b.
  • the panel member 390 b manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b .
  • a distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b
  • an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 b may protrude toward the first jig 710 b .
  • the distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b .
  • the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b .
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may also move.
  • the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b , respectively.
  • the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be raised diagonally.
  • both ends of the panel member 390 b may be released.
  • the panel member 390 b may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 b beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b .
  • the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be lowered diagonally.
  • first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b While the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b are lowered, the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
  • a method of adhering the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • the cushion unit 790 b may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b .
  • the cushion unit 790 b may help prevent the panel member 390 b or the cover window 310 b from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the apparatus 700 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 b , the second jig 720 b , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 700 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 700 b may manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 b may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 c according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 c may include a cover window 310 c and a panel member 390 c .
  • the panel member 390 c may include at least one of a TSP 340 c or a display panel 330 c . However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 c includes both the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c.
  • the panel member 390 c may include a first adhesive layer 320 c , the TSP 340 c , a second adhesive layer 350 c , and the display panel 330 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c , the TSP 340 c , the second adhesive layer 350 c , and the display panel 330 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • At least a portion of the cover window 310 c may be curved.
  • a middle portion of the cover window 310 c may be flat and both ends of the middle portion may be curved.
  • the cover window 310 c may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material as described above.
  • the cover window 310 c may be formed such that a surface to which the display panel 330 c is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
  • the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c and the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be attached to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 c .
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be provided on a protruding portion, instead of a recessed portion, of the curved cover window 310 c.
  • the display device 300 c shaped as described above may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 c may include a first jig 410 c , a second jig 420 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 c ), and a cushion unit 490 c .
  • At least a portion of the first jig 410 c may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c .
  • an outer surface of the first jig 410 c on which the cover window 310 c is seated may be the same as or similar in shape to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c seated on the outer surface of the first jig 410 c .
  • the first jig 410 c may protrude toward the second jig 420 c.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 c may be recessed away from the first jig 410 c to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 c.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 c and a second driving unit 425 c .
  • the first driving unit 415 c may linearly move the first jig 410 c toward the second jig 420 c
  • the second driving unit 425 c may linearly move the second jig 420 c toward the first jig 410 c .
  • the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 c provided on the first jig 410 c and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 c .
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 c .
  • the first fixing unit 430 c and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • the first fixing unit 430 c may be formed in various ways.
  • the first fixing unit 430 c may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
  • the first fixing unit 430 c may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit as described above.
  • the first fixing unit 430 c is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 c and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 c .
  • the first fixing unit 430 c includes an adhesive member and is provided on an outer surface of a first cushion unit 493 c.
  • the cushion unit 490 c may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c .
  • a size of the cushion unit 490 c may be less than a size of at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c .
  • the cushion unit 490 c may be disposed only on a contact portion with at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c , and may be disposed to extend beyond the contact portion.
  • the cushion unit 490 c may be the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cushion unit 490 c may include the first cushion unit 493 c that is provided on a surface of the first jig 410 c , and a second cushion unit 491 c that is provided on a surface of the second jig 420 c .
  • the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may be integrally formed and respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c .
  • first cushion units 493 c and the second cushion units 491 c may be formed, and the plurality of first cushion units 493 c and the plurality of second cushion units 491 c may be provided on an outer surface of the first jig 410 c and an outer surface of the second jig 420 c , respectively, and spaced apart from each other.
  • first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c are respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c.
  • the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 410 c .
  • the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed to the first fixing unit 430 c .
  • a size of the first fixing unit 430 c may be less than a size of the cover window 310 c.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c may be disposed on the second jig 420 c .
  • the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 420 c
  • the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 410 c.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
  • the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may operate to separate the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c.
  • the apparatus 400 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 c , the second jig 420 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 400 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
  • the apparatus 400 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
  • the apparatus 400 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 c may include a first jig 510 c , a second jig 520 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 c ), a cushion unit 590 c , and a clamping unit 550 c .
  • the first jig 510 c , the second jig 520 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 c (including a first cushion unit 593 c and a second cushion unit 591 c ) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 550 c may include a first clamping unit 551 c and a second clamping unit 552 c .
  • the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c .
  • the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 c .
  • the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 510 c .
  • the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by a first fixing unit 530 c.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 c .
  • the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 520 c
  • the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 510 c .
  • the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 c and a second driving unit 525 c .
  • a flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c , and curved ends of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c do not move.
  • the first cushion unit 593 c and the second cushion unit 591 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
  • the first driving unit 515 c and the second driving unit 525 c may operate to separate the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c.
  • the apparatus 500 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 c , the second jig 520 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 500 c may include a pressure adjustment unit for adjusting a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 500 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
  • the apparatus 500 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 c may include a first jig 610 c , a second jig 620 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 c ), a cushion unit 690 c , a clamping unit 650 c , and a linear driving unit L.
  • the first jig 610 c , the second jig 620 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 c (including a first cushion unit 693 c and a second cushion unit 691 c ), and the clamping unit 650 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 c , and a second linear driving unit 670 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 c .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 c moves (e.g., in a moving direction of the second jig 620 c ).
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 c.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first shaft 661 c that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first driving module 665 c that drives the first shaft 661 c .
  • the first driving module 665 c may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 c includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 c includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 c rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first elastic unit 663 c that surrounds the first shaft 661 c .
  • the first elastic unit 663 c may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 c includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 c may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 c as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 c when the first clamping unit 651 c moves.
  • the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 610 c .
  • the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 c .
  • the cover window 310 c may be disposed such that a protruding portion faces the second jig 620 c.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 c .
  • the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 620 c
  • the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 610 c .
  • the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c .
  • a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c may be disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c , or may be disposed adjacent to the cover window 310 c .
  • a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c are disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c.
  • the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 c and a second driving unit 625 c .
  • the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may sequentially contact and laminated beginning from a flat portion of the cover window 310 c toward both ends of the panel member 390 c.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c move.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
  • the first cushion unit 693 c and the second cushion unit 691 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
  • the first driving unit 615 c and the second driving unit 625 c may operate to separate the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
  • the apparatus 600 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 c , the second jig 620 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 600 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • the apparatus 600 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
  • the apparatus 600 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 c may include a first jig 710 c , a second jig 720 c , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 c ), a cushion unit 790 c , a clamping unit 750 c , and a linear driving unit L.
  • the first jig 710 c , the second jig 720 c , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 c , the clamping unit 750 c , and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 751 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 c , and a second linear driving unit 770 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 752 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 c .
  • the first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c in a diagonal direction.
  • first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 c.
  • the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 710 c .
  • the cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c.
  • the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 c .
  • the display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 720 c
  • the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 710 c .
  • the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c .
  • the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c as described above.
  • the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 c and a second driving unit 725 c .
  • a flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c , and both end portions of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c move.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
  • a first cushion unit 793 c and a second cushion unit 791 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c , the TSP 340 c , and the display panel 330 c.
  • the first driving unit 715 c and the second driving unit 725 c may operate to separate the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
  • the apparatus 700 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 c , the second jig 720 c , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 700 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • the apparatus 700 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c .
  • the apparatus 700 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 d according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 d may include a cover window 310 d and a panel member 390 d as described above.
  • the display device 300 d may include a first adhesive layer 320 d that is disposed between the panel member 390 d and the cover window 310 d .
  • the panel member 390 d may include a display panel 330 d and a TSP 340 d as described above.
  • a second adhesive layer 350 d may be provided between the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d to attach the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 d is curved.
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 d is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is curved.
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R.
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
  • it will be assumed that the cover window 310 d is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a convex portion of the cover window 310 d faces the first adhesive layer 320 d .
  • the TSP 340 d , the second adhesive layer 350 d , and the display panel 330 d may be attached and fixed to a convex outer surface of the cover window 310 d on the first adhesive layer 320 d.
  • the display device 300 d since the display device 300 d is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 d may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 d may include a first jig 410 d , a second jig 420 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 d ), and a cushion unit 490 d (including a first cushion unit 493 d and a second cushion unit 491 d ).
  • An outer surface of the first jig 410 d on which the cover window 310 d is seated may be the same as or similar to an outer surface of the cover window 310 d contacting the first jig 410 d .
  • the first jig 410 d may have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius to correspond to the cover window 310 d .
  • the first jig 410 d may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 d.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be recessed away from the first jig 410 d to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 d .
  • the outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 d and a second driving unit 425 d .
  • the first driving unit 415 d may linearly move the first jig 410 d toward the second jig 420 d
  • the second driving unit 425 d may linearly move the second jig 420 d toward the first jig 410 d .
  • the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 d provided on the first jig 410 d and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 d .
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 d .
  • the first fixing unit 430 d and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • the first fixing unit 430 d may be formed in various ways.
  • the first fixing unit 430 d may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
  • the first fixing unit 430 d may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit.
  • the first fixing unit 430 d is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 d and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 d .
  • the first fixing unit 430 d includes an adhesive member.
  • the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 410 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 d .
  • the first fixing unit 430 d may adhere and fix the cover window 310 d.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d may be disposed on the second jig 420 d .
  • the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 420 d
  • the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 410 d.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d .
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the cushion unit 490 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
  • the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may operate to separate the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 410 d or the second jig 420 d.
  • the apparatus 400 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 d , the second jig 420 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 400 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 400 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
  • the apparatus 400 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 d may include a first jig 510 d , a second jig 520 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 d ), a cushion unit 590 d , and a clamping unit 550 d .
  • the first jig 510 d , the second jig 520 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 d (including a first cushion unit 593 d and a second cushion unit 591 d ) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 550 d may include a first clamping unit 551 d and a second clamping unit 552 d .
  • the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d .
  • the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 d .
  • the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 510 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 530 d.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 d .
  • the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 520 d
  • the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 510 d .
  • the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 d and a second driving unit 525 d .
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d do not move.
  • the first cushion unit 593 d and the second cushion unit 591 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
  • the first driving unit 515 d and the second driving unit 525 d may operate to separate the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d.
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d.
  • the apparatus 500 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 510 d , the second jig 520 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 500 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 500 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
  • the apparatus 500 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 d may include a first jig 610 d , a second jig 620 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 d ), a cushion unit 690 d , a clamping unit 650 d , and a linear driving unit L.
  • the first jig 610 d , the second jig 620 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 d , and the clamping unit 650 d are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 d that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d , and a second linear driving unit 670 d that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 d .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 d moves.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 d.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first shaft 661 d that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first driving module 665 d that drives the first shaft 661 d .
  • the first driving module 665 d may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 d includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 d includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 d rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first elastic unit 663 d that surrounds the first shaft 661 d .
  • the first elastic unit 663 d may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 d includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 d may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 d as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 d when the first clamping unit 651 d moves.
  • the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 610 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 d.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 d .
  • the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 620 d
  • the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 610 d .
  • the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into a first clamping unit 651 d and a second clamping unit 652 d.
  • the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that at least one portion protrudes more than other portions toward the cover window 310 d or toward the second jig 620 d .
  • at least one portion of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d protrudes more than other portions toward the second jig 620 d.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 d and a second driving unit 625 d .
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d move.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
  • a first cushion unit 693 d and a second cushion unit 691 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
  • the first driving unit 615 d and the second driving unit 625 d may operate to separate the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
  • the apparatus 600 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 610 d , the second jig 620 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 600 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • the apparatus 600 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
  • the apparatus 600 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 d may include a first jig 710 d , a second jig 720 d , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 d ), a cushion unit 790 d , a clamping unit 750 d , and a linear driving unit L.
  • the first jig 710 d , the second jig 720 d , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 d , the clamping unit 750 d , and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 d that is provided on the first clamping unit 751 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 d , and a second linear driving unit 770 d that is provided on the second clamping unit 752 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 d .
  • the first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d in a diagonal direction.
  • first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 d.
  • the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 710 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 d .
  • the cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 730 d.
  • the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 d .
  • the display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 720 d
  • the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 710 d .
  • the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d.
  • the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d . In other embodiments, the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are higher in position than other portions. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that central portions of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d are lower in position than other portions.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 d and a second driving unit 725 d .
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d , and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d move.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
  • a first cushion unit 793 d and a second cushion unit 791 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d , the TSP 340 d , and the display panel 330 d.
  • the first driving unit 715 d and the second driving unit 725 d may operate to separate the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
  • the apparatus 700 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 710 d , the second jig 720 d , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 700 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • the apparatus 700 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d .
  • the apparatus 700 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 e according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention.
  • the display device 300 e may include a cover window 310 e and a panel member 390 e as described above.
  • the display device 300 e may include a first adhesive layer 320 e that is disposed between the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
  • the panel member 390 e may include a display panel 330 e and a TSP 340 e as described above.
  • a second adhesive layer 350 e may be provided between the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e to attach the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • At least a portion of the cover window 310 e may be curved.
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 e is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius.
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in a longitudinal direction or a width direction.
  • the cover window 310 e may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3.
  • N is a natural number
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed to protrude toward the first adhesive layer 320 e .
  • the TSP 340 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , and the display panel 330 e may be sequentially stacked and fixed to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 e on the first adhesive layer 320 e . Accordingly, since the display device 300 e is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radii, the display device 300 e may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 e may include a first jig 410 e , a second jig 420 e , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 e ), and a cushion unit 490 e .
  • An outer surface of the first jig 410 e on which the cover window 310 e is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 e contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 e .
  • the first jig 410 e may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 e .
  • the first jig 410 e may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 e.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 e may be recessed away from the first jig 410 e to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 e .
  • the outer surface of the second jig 420 e may include at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 e and a second driving unit 425 e .
  • the first driving unit 415 e may linearly move the first jig 410 e toward the second jig 420 e
  • the second driving unit 425 e may linearly move the second jig 420 e toward the first jig 410 e
  • the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 e provided on the first jig 410 e and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 e .
  • the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 e .
  • the first fixing unit 430 e and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • the first fixing unit 430 e may be formed in various ways.
  • the first fixing unit 430 e may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck.
  • the first fixing unit 430 e may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit.
  • the first fixing unit 430 e is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 e and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 e .
  • the first fixing unit 430 e includes an adhesive member.
  • the cushion unit 490 e may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e .
  • the cushion unit is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the cushion unit is provided on each of the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e.
  • the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared.
  • a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 e is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e.
  • the cover window 310 e may be disposed on the first jig 410 e .
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 e .
  • the cover window 310 e may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 430 e.
  • the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e may be disposed on the second jig 420 e .
  • the display panel 330 e may be disposed to face the second jig 420 e
  • the TSP 340 e may be disposed to face the first jig 410 e.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 e.
  • the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e .
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 e may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 e to both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • a first cushion unit 493 e and a second cushion unit 491 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
  • the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may operate to separate the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e .
  • the operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 e from the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e.
  • the apparatus 400 e may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4 C ) in which the first jig 410 e , the second jig 420 e , the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed.
  • the apparatus 400 e may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated.
  • the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • the apparatus 400 e may manufacture any type of display device 300 e .
  • the apparatus 400 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 500 e includes a first jig 510 e , a second jig 520 e , a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 e ), and a cushion unit 590 e .
  • the first jig 510 e , the second jig 520 e , the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 e and a second driving unit 525 e
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 e .
  • the first driving unit 515 e , the second driving unit 525 e , and the first fixing unit 530 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the apparatus 500 e includes a clamping unit 550 e that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e , and supports the panel member 390 e .
  • the clamping unit 550 e is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 e.
  • the clamping unit 550 e may support the panel member 390 e when one end of the panel member 390 e is inserted into the clamping unit 550 e .
  • a plurality of the clamping units 550 e may be provided, where a distance S7 between the clamping units 550 e is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 e .
  • the panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S7 between the plurality of clamping units 550 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 e face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 e , and fix both ends of the display panel 330 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , the TSP 340 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e .
  • the plurality of clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 e and a second clamping unit 552 e that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface and a simple structure.
  • the apparatus 500 e may accurately attach the cover window 310 e having a curved surface to the panel member 390 e , a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • the apparatus 500 e since the apparatus 500 e includes the clamping unit 550 e to accurately align the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e , working efficiency may be improved.
  • the cover window 310 e may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 e may be formed, and then the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e .
  • the cover window 310 e may be mounted on the first jig 510 e as described above.
  • the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e , which may then be fixed to the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e .
  • a method of fixing the TSP 340 e may include inserting and fixing both ends of the TSP 340 e into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e as described above.
  • portions of the display panel 330 e , the second adhesive layer 350 e , the TSP 340 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e may protrude toward the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e .
  • the portions may protrude toward the second jig 520 e or protrude toward the first jig 510 e .
  • the portions may protrude toward the second jig 520 e or protrude toward the first jig 510 e .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e .
  • the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e.
  • the first driving unit 515 e and the second driving unit 525 e may operate to move the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e closer to each other.
  • a protruding portion of the cover window 310 e first contacts the first adhesive layer 320 e .
  • the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be laminated beginning from a contact portion between the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e toward both end portions.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • a first cushion unit 593 e and a second cushion unit 591 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed and laminated.
  • the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 500 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
  • FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 600 e includes a first jig 610 e , a second jig 620 e , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 e , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 e ), a cushion unit 690 e , and a linear moving unit L.
  • the first jig 610 e , the second jig 620 e , the driving unit, the clamping unit 650 e , the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 e and a second driving unit 625 e
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 e .
  • the first driving unit 615 e , the second driving unit 625 e , and the first fixing unit 630 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 650 e may include a first clamping unit 651 e and a second clamping unit 652 e .
  • the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear moving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 e and a second linear driving unit 670 e that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e are formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 e.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first shaft 661 e that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 e and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 e .
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first driving module 665 e that drives the first shaft 661 e .
  • the first driving module 665 e may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 e includes a motor.
  • the first shaft 661 e includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 e rotates.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first elastic unit 663 e that surrounds the first shaft 661 e .
  • the first elastic unit 663 e may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 e includes a compression spring.
  • the first elastic unit 663 e may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 e as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 e when the first clamping unit 651 e moves.
  • the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e .
  • the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e prepared as described above may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 e , and then the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e .
  • both ends of the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e on which the first adhesive layer 320 e is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
  • a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or may protrude toward the first jig 610 e .
  • a distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width or a length of the panel member 390 e , a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or protrude toward the first jig 610 e .
  • the distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and a portion of the panel member 390 e protrudes toward the second jig 620 e.
  • the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 e or the second jig 620 e .
  • the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed against each other by moving both the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e .
  • the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 e moves.
  • the panel member 390 e may be raised while maintaining its curved state.
  • the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may release the panel member 390 e.
  • the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
  • the first driving unit 615 e and the second driving unit 625 e may continuously operate to make the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e get closer to each other.
  • the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed.
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e is performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • a first cushion unit 693 e and a second cushion unit 691 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed and laminated.
  • the apparatus 600 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 600 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 700 e may include a first jig 710 e , a second jig 720 e , a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 e , a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 e ), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 e (including a first cushion unit 793 e and a second cushion unit 791 e ).
  • the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 e and a second driving unit 725 e
  • the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 e .
  • the first driving unit 715 e , the second driving unit 725 e , and the first fixing unit 730 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the clamping unit 750 e may include a first clamping unit 751 e and a second clamping unit 752 e .
  • the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 e and a second linear driving unit 770 e , and the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e , respectively.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 e may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 e , the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 e.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 e may include a first shaft 761 e , a first driving module 765 e , and a first elastic unit 763 e .
  • the first shaft 761 e , the first driving module 765 e , and the first elastic unit 763 e may be formed in a similar manner to those described above except that the first shaft 761 e is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 e.
  • the first driving module 765 e may vary a length of the first shaft 761 e . Since the first driving module 765 e and the first shaft 761 e are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 e as described above, the first clamping unit 751 e may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 e.
  • the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
  • the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
  • the first shaft 761 e may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 e operates.
  • the first shaft 761 e may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first driving module 765 e rotates.
  • a method of manufacturing the display device 300 e may be similar to that described above.
  • the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be manufactured and prepared.
  • the panel member 390 e may include the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 e includes both the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e , and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e.
  • the panel member 390 e manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e .
  • the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 e or the second jig 720 e .
  • a method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may also move.
  • the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e , respectively.
  • the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be raised diagonally.
  • both ends of the panel member 390 e may be released.
  • the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e .
  • the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be lowered diagonally.
  • first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e While the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are lowered, the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
  • a method of adhering the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e .
  • the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may help prevent the panel member 390 e or the cover window 310 e from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
  • a load range applied when the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa.
  • the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other.
  • the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • the apparatus 700 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • the apparatus 700 e may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated when the display panel 330 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed.
  • This application relates in general to a display device and more particularly, to a display device and a corresponding method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device that may rapidly, accurately, and cleanly manufacture the display device having a curved shape.
  • Small electronic devices having curved display devices have presented challenges in accurately forming and aligning their corresponding cover windows (for example, transparent protective covers) and display panels (such as OLED display panels or flexible OLED display panels), and adhering the cover windows to the display panels via transparent adhesive without quality defects such as air bubbles between the cover windows and the display panels.
  • Embodiments of the present invention address these problems by providing a display device having a curved cover window, a display panel and/or touch screen panel (TSP) that fits in the cover window, and an adhesive layer between the display device and the cover window, together with an apparatus and method for manufacturing the display device.
  • the cover window is fabricated with a curved shape (such as rounded edges, inward or outward) and mounted on a first jig having a mount surface that conforms to the cover window.
  • the cover window may sit in the first jig (through gravity) or attach to the first jig via a fixing unit, such as a vacuum suction device.
  • the display panel to which the adhesive layer is attached
  • the distance between the jigs is then closed (by moving one or both jigs towards the other using, for example, driving units), allowing the display panel to press up to the cover window and adhere via the adhesive layer, and without forming air bubbles between the cover window and the display panel.
  • the display panel may be attached to a clamp unit, such as a pair of clamps, and bent through a clamping force to mate cleanly with the cover window when the jigs are moved towards each other.
  • the clamps may be moved via dedicated driving units (for example, which drive ball screws through rotational movement to move the clamps) independently of the jigs, and may move, for example vertically or diagonally with respect to the jigs (and with respect to a gravity direction).

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Vehicle Body Suspensions (AREA)
  • Diaphragms For Electromechanical Transducers (AREA)
  • Measuring Pulse, Heart Rate, Blood Pressure Or Blood Flow (AREA)

Abstract

A display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window. A method of manufacturing a display device includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig. An apparatus for manufacturing a display device includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED PATENT APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of, and claims priority to and the benefit of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/794,720, filed on Jul. 8, 2015, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,795, filed on Jun. 28, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 11,523,522 B2, issued on Dec. 6, 2022, which claims priority to and the benefit of Korean Patent Application Nos. 10-2012-0071375, filed on Jun. 29, 2012, 10-2013-0014650, filed on Feb. 8, 2013, and 10-2013-0062110, filed on May 30, 2013 in the Korean Intellectual Property Office, the entire contents of all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • BACKGROUND 1. Field
  • Aspects of embodiments of the present invention relate to a display device, and a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
  • 2. Description of the Related Art
  • Electronic devices based on portability are widely used. Portable electronic devices that have recently been widely used include small electronic devices such as mobile phones as well as tablet personal computers (PCs). In order to support various functions, portable electronic devices include a display device for providing visual information such as an image to a user. Recently, as sizes of components for driving display devices have decreased, the importance of display devices in electronic devices has increased. Accordingly, display devices (such as flexible display devices) that bend at a set angle (for example, a predetermined angle) have been developed.
  • In general, flexible display devices that may bend at a set angle may be manufactured using a flexible process, such as being flexibly manufactured. Since a flexible display device may be formed of a flexible material, the flexible display device may have any of various shapes. A flexible display device may be manufactured by forming a light-emitting unit on a substrate to form a display unit, and sealing the display unit by using an encapsulation unit, which may increase a lifetime of the display unit. The substrate may be formed of a flexible material, and the encapsulation unit may be formed, for example, as a substrate or a thin film. As designs of electronic devices have recently been diversified, demands for flexible display devices have increased.
  • SUMMARY
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide for a display device having a curved shape (for example, having an arc shape or a degree of curvature) that may enable efficient mass production, high reliability, and high quality. Further embodiments provide for a method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device.
  • According to an embodiment of the present invention, a display device is provided. The display device includes a cover window including a curved portion, and a panel member laminated on the cover window.
  • The panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
  • The display device may further include an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
  • The cover window may further include a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
  • The panel member may be laminated entirely on the flat portion.
  • The curved portion may include a plurality of curved portions.
  • The panel member may include a first panel portion laminated on the flat portion, and a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and laminated on the curved portion.
  • The cover window may have a curved surface having a curvature radius.
  • A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
  • The panel member may be formed on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • The panel member may be flexible.
  • According to another embodiment of the present invention, a method of manufacturing a display device is provided. The method includes mounting a cover window including a curved portion on a first jig including a curved portion, mounting a panel member on a second jig that conforms to a surface of the first jig, and laminating the cover window to the panel member by moving a first one of the first jig or the second jig to a first other one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • At least a portion of the panel member may contact a surface of the second jig.
  • The panel member may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig.
  • The panel member may be smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
  • The panel member may be flat during the mounting of the panel member on the second jig. The laminating of the cover window to the panel member may include partially curving the panel member by the moving of the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The first one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first other one of the first jig or the second jig, or the first other one of the first jig or the second jig may be above the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from a second other one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The second other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The mounting of the panel member may include fixing the panel member to the second jig.
  • The panel member may be flexible.
  • Outer surfaces of the cover window and the first jig may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • The panel member may be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus for manufacturing a display device is provided. The apparatus includes a first jig including a mount surface that is partially curved to conform to a surface of a cover window, a second jig including a surface conforming to the mount surface and configured to contact a panel member, and a driving unit connected to a first one of the first jig or the second jig and configured to move the first one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The first jig may further include a first fixing unit for fixing the cover window to the mount surface. The second jig may further include a second fixing unit for fixing the panel member to the surface conforming to the mount surface.
  • The first fixing unit or the second fixing unit may include an absorption unit, and an absorption pump for evacuating air from the absorption unit.
  • The apparatus may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The cushion unit may include a plurality of cushion units at respective ends of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig. A distance between the cushion units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member.
  • A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by recessing away from or protruding toward the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • The panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • The panel member may include at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • The apparatus may further include a clamping unit spaced from the second jig and configured to support the panel member.
  • The clamping unit may include a plurality of clamping units. A distance between the clamping units may be less than at least one of a length or a width of the panel member when the clamping units support the panel member.
  • The apparatus may further include a linear driving unit coupled to the clamping unit and configured to linearly move the clamping unit.
  • The linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a same direction as a moving direction of the second jig.
  • The linear driving unit may be further configured to linearly move the clamping unit in a diagonal direction of a moving direction of the second jig.
  • At least one of the first jig or the second jig may further include a cushion unit at an outer surface of the at least one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • A second one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from another one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • The other one of the first jig or the second jig may be formed by protruding toward or recessing away from the second one of the first jig or the second jig.
  • An outer surface of the cover window and an outer surface of the first jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be curved surfaces each having a curvature radius.
  • A curvature radius of a portion of the cover window may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window. A curvature radius of a portion of an outer surface of the jig on which the cover window is configured to be seated may be different from a curvature radius of another portion of the outer surface of the first jig.
  • The panel member may be configured to be attached to a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
  • The panel member may include least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The above and other features and aspects of the present invention will become more apparent by describing in detail exemplary embodiments thereof with reference to the attached drawings in which:
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel of the display device of FIG. 1 ;
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIGS. 4A through 4C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIGS. 7A through 7C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIGS. 9A through 9C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention; and
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to still another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus for manufacturing the display device of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more fully with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which exemplary embodiments are shown. The present invention may, however, be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as being limited to the embodiments set forth herein. These embodiments are provided to make this disclosure more thorough, and to help convey concepts of the invention to one of ordinary skill in the art. The terminology used herein is for describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the present invention.
  • As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. Expressions such as “at least one of,” when preceding a list of elements, modify the entire list of elements and do not modify the individual elements of the list. As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms “comprises,” “comprising,” “includes,” and/or “including,” when used herein, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. It will be understood that, although the terms first, second, third, etc., may be used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another element.
  • In the embodiments of the present invention, examples of display devices include various display devices. For example, examples of display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic light-emitting display devices. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display devices are organic light-emitting display devices. Herein, the use of the term “may,” when describing embodiments of the present invention, refers to “one or more embodiments of the present invention.” In addition, the use of alternative language, such as “or,” when describing embodiments of the present invention, refers to “one or more embodiments of the present invention” for each corresponding item listed.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display panel 130 of the display device 100 of FIG. 1 .
  • Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2 , the display device 100 includes a cover window 110, a panel member (for example, display panel 130), and an adhesive layer 120. In FIG. 1 , the cover window 110 is partially curved. That is, the cover window 110 has a flat portion 111 (on which the display panel 130 is laminated, with the adhesive layer 120 therebetween) and at least one end of the flat portion 111 is curved (e.g., a curved portion 112). As shown in FIG. 1 , both ends of the flat portion 111 are curved (e.g., two curved portions 112). As depicted, the cover window 110 includes the flat portion 111 and curved portions 112 that extend from the flat portion 111. The curved portions 112 are formed on both ends of the flat portion 111.
  • The panel member may include at least one of the display panel 130 or a touch screen panel (TSP). In one embodiment, the panel member may include only the display panel 130 and may be attached to the cover window 110. In another embodiment, the panel member may include only the TSP and may be attached to the cover window 110. In yet another embodiment, the panel member may include the display panel 130 and the TSP, and may be attached to the cover window 110. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes only the display panel 130.
  • The display panel 130 may be flexible. The display panel 130 may be formed such that a size of the display panel 130 is different from a size of the cover window 110. As shown, the display panel 130 is smaller than the cover window 110. For example, the display panel 130 is shorter in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 110 (due to the inward curvature of the cover window 110). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display panel 130 is shorter in width than the cover window 110 as described below in further detail. For example, the display panel 130 may be laminated entirely on the flat portion 111 (and not on any of the curved portions 112). The display panel 130 includes a first substrate S and a light-emitting unit.
  • The display panel 130 may include an encapsulation unit B formed on the light-emitting unit. The encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate instead of or in addition to a thin film. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the encapsulation unit B is formed as a thin film.
  • In FIG. 2 , the light-emitting unit is formed on the first substrate S. The light-emitting unit includes a thin film transistor (TFT, in this case a driving TFT), a passivation film 131 formed to cover the TFT, and an organic light-emitting device, such as an organic light emitting diode (OLED) 138 formed on the passivation film 131. The first substrate S may be formed of a glass material, but the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the first substrate S may be formed of a plastic material or a metal material such as steel use stainless (SUS, or stainless steel) or titanium (Ti). In another embodiment, the first substrate S may include polyimide (PI). For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first substrate S is formed of PI.
  • A buffer layer 132 formed of an organic compound and/or an inorganic compound such as SiOx (x≥1) or SiNx (x≥1) is formed on a top surface of the first substrate S. An active layer 133 having a set pattern (for example, a predetermined pattern) is formed on the buffer layer 132, and then is covered by a gate insulating layer 134. The active layer 133 includes a source region 133 a and a drain region 133 c, and a channel region 133 b located between the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c. The active layer 133 may be formed by forming an amorphous silicon film on the buffer layer 132, crystallizing the amorphous silicon film to form a polycrystalline silicon film, and patterning the polycrystalline silicon film. The source and drain regions 133 a and 133 c of the active layer 133 are doped with impurities according to a type of the TFT such as a driving TFT (for example, driving TFT in FIG. 2 ) or a switching TFT.
  • A gate electrode 135 corresponding to the channel region 113 b of the active layer 133 and an interlayer insulating layer 136 covering the gate electrode 135 are formed on a top surface of the gate insulating layer 134. After contact holes (for example, via-hole H1) are formed in the interlayer insulating layer 136 and the gate insulating layer 134, a source electrode 137 a and a drain electrode 137 b are formed on the interlayer insulating layer 136 to respectively contact the source region 133 a and the drain region 133 c.
  • In some embodiments, a reflective film is formed at the same time (for example, in the same layer) as the source/ drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b are formed as described above. Accordingly, each of the source/ drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a material having high electrical conductivity and having a thickness great enough to reflect light. Each of the source/ drain electrodes 137 a and 137 b may be formed of a metal material such as silver (Ag), magnesium (Mg), aluminum (Al), platinum (Pt), palladium (Pd), gold (Au), nickel (Ni), neodymium (Nd), iridium (Ir), chromium (Cr), lithium (Li), calcium (Ca), or a compound or alloy thereof.
  • The passivation film 131 is formed on the TFT. Then a pixel electrode 138 a of the OLED 138 is formed on the passivation film 131. The pixel electrode 138 a contacts the drain electrode 137 b of the TFT through a via-hole H2 formed in the passivation film 131. The passivation film 131 may be formed of an inorganic material and/or an organic material and have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. As shown in FIG. 2 , the passivation film 131 is formed as a planarization film having a flat top surface regardless of any roughness or irregularities of a bottom surface. The passivation film 131 may be formed of a transparent insulating material to achieve a resonance effect.
  • After the pixel electrode 138 a is formed on the passivation film 131, a pixel-defining film 139 is formed of an organic material and/or an inorganic material to cover the pixel electrode 138 a and the passivation film 131, and is opened to expose the pixel electrode 138 a. An organic light-emitting layer 138 b and a counter electrode 138 c are formed on at least the pixel electrode 138 a. The pixel electrode 138 a functions as an anode and the counter electrode 138 c functions as a cathode, or vice versa.
  • The pixel electrode 138 a may be formed of a material having a high work function, such as indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), In2O3, or ZnO. The counter electrode 138 c may be formed of a metal material having a low work function such as Ag, Mg, Al, Pt, Pd, Au, Ni, Nd, Ir, Cr, Li, Ca, or a compound or alloy thereof. For example, the counter electrode 138 c may be formed of Mg, Ag, or Al to have a small thickness to function as a semi-transmissive reflective film. Accordingly, the counter electrode 138 c may optically resonate to transmit light.
  • The pixel electrode 138 a and the counter electrode 138 c are insulated from each other by the organic light-emitting layer 138 b, and apply voltages of different polarities to the organic light-emitting layer 138 b for the organic light-emitting layer 138 b to emit light. The organic light-emitting layer 138 b may be formed of a low molecular weight organic material or a high molecular weight organic material.
  • If the organic light-emitting layer 138 b is formed of a low molecular weight organic material, the light-emitting layer 138 b may have a single-layer or multi-layer structure formed by stacking a hole injection layer (HIL), a hole transport layer (HTL), an emission layer (EML), an electron transport layer (ETL), and an electron injection layer (EIL). Examples of the low molecular weight organic material include copper phthalocyanine (CuPc), N,N′-Di(naphthalene-1-yl)-N,N′-diphenyl-benzidine (NPB), and tris-8-hydroxyquinoline aluminum (Alq3). The low molecular weight organic material is formed by using vacuum deposition. The HIL, the HTL, the ETL, and the EIL may be commonly applied to red, green, and blue pixels. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the common layers may cover all pixels, like the counter electrode 138 c.
  • If the organic light-emitting layer 138 b is formed of a high molecular weight organic material, the organic light-emitting layer 138 b may have a structure including an HTL and an EML. The HTL may be formed of poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) (PEDOT) and the EML may be formed of a high molecular weight organic material based on polyphenylene vinylene (PPV) or polyfluorene. The high molecular weight organic material may be formed by using screen printing or inkjet printing. The organic light-emitting layer 138 b is not limited thereto, and various examples may be formed, applied, deposited, etc., as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • The encapsulation unit B may be formed as a thin film as described above. In further detail, the encapsulation unit B may be formed by alternately stacking at least one organic layer and at least one inorganic layer. In some embodiments, a plurality of inorganic layers or a plurality of organic layers may be provided.
  • The organic layer may be formed of a polymer, and may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure formed of one or more selected from the group including polyethylene terephthalate, polyimide, polycarbonate, epoxy, polyethylene, and polyacrylate. In one embodiment, the organic layer may be formed of polyacrylate. In further detail, the organic layer may be formed by polymerizing a monomer composition including a diacrylate-based monomer and a triacrylate-based monomer. A monoacrylate-based monomer may be further included in the monomer composition. In one embodiment, a well-known photoinitiator such as TPO may be further included in the monomer composition, but other embodiments of the present embodiment are not necessarily limited thereto.
  • The inorganic layer may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure including a metal oxide or a metal nitride. In further detail, the inorganic layer may include one or more selected from the group including SiNx, Al2O3, SiO2, and TiO2. In one embodiment, an uppermost layer of the encapsulation unit B that is exposed to the outside may be an inorganic layer to reduce or prevent moisture from penetrating into the organic light-emitting device.
  • The encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one organic layer is inserted between at least two inorganic layers. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may have at least one sandwich structure in which at least one inorganic layer is inserted between at least two organic layers.
  • The encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, and a second inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the display unit. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, and a third inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit. In another embodiment, the encapsulation unit B may include a first inorganic layer, a first organic layer, a second inorganic layer, a second organic layer, a third inorganic layer, a third organic layer, and a fourth inorganic layer that are sequentially stacked on the light-emitting unit.
  • A halogenated metal layer including LiF may be further disposed between the light-emitting unit and the first inorganic layer. The halogenated metal layer may reduce or prevent the light-emitting unit from being damaged when the first inorganic layer is formed by using sputtering or plasma deposition.
  • The first organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may have an area smaller than that of the third inorganic layer. In one embodiment, the first organic layer may be completely covered by the second inorganic layer, and the second organic layer may be completely covered by the third inorganic layer.
  • The encapsulation unit B may include a second substrate as described above. The second substrate may be formed similarly to the first substrate S. For example, the second substrate may be formed of a glass material, but like the first substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, the second substrate may be formed of a different material, such as a plastic material.
  • The display device 100 may include a touch panel formed on the display panel 130 as described above. The touch panel may be located between the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120. In other embodiments, the touch panel may be a panel positioned on the display panel 130. For example, the touch panel may be formed on the encapsulation unit B. In another embodiment, the touch panel may be formed on the cover window 110 to have a panel shape or to have a pattern. As a method of forming a touch panel is well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, a detailed description thereof will not be given. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a touch panel is not formed on the display panel 130.
  • The display device 100 includes the adhesive layer 120 that is located between the display panel 130 and the cover window 110. The adhesive layer 120 may be variously formed. For example, the adhesive layer 120 may include an adhesive film such as an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
  • The adhesive layer 120 may have the same size as the display panel 130. In other embodiments, the adhesive layer 120 may be smaller than the display panel 130. The adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130 to laminate the display panel 130 to the cover window 110. For example, the adhesive layer 120 may be applied to the encapsulation unit B.
  • Accordingly, the display device 100 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. A method of manufacturing the display device 100 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 3 through 4C.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 200 for manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 4A through 4C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 100 of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The same elements as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • Referring to FIGS. 3 through 4C, the apparatus 200 includes a first jig 210 that is partially curved and has a mount surface 211 that conforms to one surface of the cover window 110. In FIGS. 3 through 4C, the first jig 210 has a shape similar to that of the cover window 110. That is, the mount surface 211 of the first jig 210 is curved. In addition, the mount surface 211 has a flat portion on which the flat portion 111 of the cover window is mounted and the mount surface 211 has curved portions on which the curved portions 112 of the cover window are mounted. For example, the mount surface 211 may be formed by being recessed in the first jig 210.
  • The apparatus 200 includes a second jig 220 that detachably couples to the first jig 210. One surface of the second jig 220 conforms to the mount surface 211. In FIGS. 3 through 4C, one surface of the second jig 220 is curved in places to conform to the portions of the mount surface 211 that are curved, and is flat in places to conform to the portion of the mount surface 211 that is flat. That is, the second jig 220 is curved such that the second jig 220 protrudes toward the first jig 210. The display panel 130 is mounted on the flat surface of the second jig 220.
  • At least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of an elastic material. In addition, at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220 may be formed of a hard material.
  • In particular, the elastic material may be a soft material having an elastic force such as silicon, rubber, or a soft synthetic resin. The hard material may be a material having a high hardness such as reinforced plastic or a metal.
  • Materials of the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may be selected in various ways. For example, the first jig 210 may be formed of a metal and the second jig 220 may be formed of silicon. In another embodiment, the first jig 210 may be formed of rubber and the second jig 220 may be formed of plastic. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 are formed of hard materials.
  • The apparatus 200 may include a driving unit (such as second driving unit 225) that is connected to at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220, and that moves the corresponding at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220. The driving unit may include a first driving unit that moves the first jig 210 and the second driving unit 225 that moves the second jig 220. The first driving unit and the second driving unit 225 may be formed similarly. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the second driving unit 225 is provided.
  • The second driving unit 225 may include any of various devices. For example, the second driving unit 225 may include a cylinder that operates by air pressure or oil pressure to move the second jig 220. In other embodiments, the second driving unit 225 may include a motor that operates by electricity to move the second jig 220. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the second driving unit 225 includes a cylinder.
  • The apparatus 200 includes a fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240) that prevents or helps prevent the cover window 110 mounted on the first jig 210 from moving, or that prevents or helps prevent the display panel 130 and the adhesive layer 120 mounted on the second jig 220 from separating from the second jig 220. The fixing unit includes an absorption unit (for example, second absorption unit 241) that is formed on at least one of the first jig 210 or the second jig 220. In addition, the fixing unit includes an absorption pump (for example, second absorption pump 242) that absorbs (for example, vacuums or evacuates) air from the absorption unit. In particular, the absorption pump may be provided outside a chamber C as described below. The fixing unit is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may be formed in other various ways as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, the fixing unit may be a separate frame that is formed on the first jig 210 or the second jig 220. As another example, the fixing unit may be an adhesive member having an adhesive force.
  • The fixing unit may include a first fixing unit that is provided on the first jig 210, and includes a second fixing unit 240 that is provided on the second jig 220. The first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may be formed similarly. For example, the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130, respectively, by using air. In other embodiments, the first fixing unit and the second fixing unit 240 may fix the cover window 110 and the display panel 130, respectively, by using a separate frame. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that only the second fixing unit 240 is used and the display panel 130 is fixed by using air.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 200 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 200 may accurately laminate the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. A method of manufacturing the display device 100 by using the apparatus 200 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 4A through 4C.
  • In order to manufacture the display device 100, the cover window 110 is first fabricated. The cover window 110 may include any of various materials. For example, the cover window 110 may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material. The cover window 110 is not limited thereto and, in other embodiments, may include any material as long as the cover window 110 is partially curved or capable of being partially curved.
  • After the cover window 110 is fabricated, it may be flat, in which case the curved portions 112 may be formed by bending both ends of the cover window 110. For example, the curved portions 112 may be bent from the flat portion 111. In FIGS. 4A and 4C, the curved portions 112 extend from the flat portion 111 as described above, and each has an arc shape having a set radius (for example, a predetermined radius) or degree of curvature. In other embodiments, each of the curved portions 112 may have, for example, an oval shape instead of the arc shape.
  • The display panel 130 may be manufactured before, during, or after the cover window 110 is manufactured. A method of manufacturing the display panel 130 may be substantially the same as a method of manufacturing a general display panel (as would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art) and thus, a further detailed description thereof will not be given.
  • Once the display panel 130 is prepared, the adhesive layer 120 is attached to one surface of the display panel 130. For example, the adhesive layer 120 may be attached to the encapsulation unit B (or other second substrate) as described above with reference to FIG. 2 . The adhesive layer 120 may, for example, be attached as a film to the encapsulation unit B, or be applied as a material to the encapsulation unit B. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the adhesive layer 120 is formed as a film.
  • After the adhesive layer 120 is attached to the display panel 130, the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are respectively mounted on the first jig 210 and the second jig 220. That is, the cover window 110 is mounted on the first jig 210, and the display panel 130 is mounted on the second jig 220. The first jig 210 may be below the second jig 220 (for example, in a gravity direction).
  • Next, the distance between the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 is decreased. For example, the first jig 210 may move toward the second jig 220, or the second jig 220 may move toward the first jig 210. In other embodiments, both the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 may move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the second jig 220 moves.
  • One surface of the first jig 210 is curved to conform (for example, closely attach) to one surface of the cover window 110. In FIGS. 4A and 4C, the surface of the first jig 210 is curved by being recessed. In addition, the display panel 130 is mounted on one surface of the second jig 220. The second fixing unit 240 fixes the display panel 130 to the surface of the second jig 220.
  • In FIGS. 4B and 4C, when the display panel 130 is mounted on the second jig 220, a second absorption unit 241 contacts, adheres, or is otherwise attached or fixed to one surface of the display panel 130. The second absorption unit 241 is partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220. When the display panel 130 is positioned in this manner, the second absorption pump 242 absorbs air from the second absorption unit 241 (for example, by creating a partial vacuum or a pressure difference). Since the display panel 130 closes (for example, occludes) all or a portion of the second absorption unit 241, and air in the second absorption unit 241 is continuously absorbed (for example, vacuumed or evacuated), the second absorption unit 241 is in an almost vacuum state. When the second absorption pump 242 operates as described above, the display panel 130 attached to the second jig 220 is not separated from the second jig 220 due to the pressure difference.
  • In FIGS. 3 through 4C, a plurality of second absorption units 241 is provided. The second absorption units 241 are exposed or partially exposed through an outer surface of the second jig 220 as described above and are spaced apart from one another by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval, such as evenly spaced).
  • When the cover window 110, the adhesive layer 120, and the display panel 130 are prepared as described above, the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210 by driving the second driving unit 225. For example, the second driving unit 225 may be programmed to operate for a set period of time (for example, a predetermined period of time). When the second driving unit 225 operates in this manner, the second jig 220 approaches the first jig 210. When the second jig 220 is continuously moved toward the first jig 210, the adhesive layer 120 contacts the cover window 110.
  • In FIG. 4C, sizes of the adhesive layer 120 and the display panel 130 may be the same as or less than a size of the flat portion 111 as described above. That is, the display panel 130 may be formed such that a width of the display panel 130 is less than a width of the cover window 110, and the adhesive layer 120 may be formed such that a width of the adhesive layer 120 is less than the width of the display panel 130. Accordingly, when the second jig 220 is moved toward the first jig 210, the adhesive layer 120 contacts one surface of the flat portion 111. When the second driving unit 225 continuously operates, the adhesive layer 120 contacting the flat portion 111 is compressed against the flat portion 111. Thus, the display panel 130 and the cover window 110 may be attached to each other through lamination.
  • In particular, when the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 210 and the second jig 220 compress the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be reduced, and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are attached to each other, the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • The operation may be performed, for example in an atmospheric state or a vacuum state (such as a near vacuum state). The apparatus 200 may include the first jig 210, and the chamber C in which the second jig 220 is disposed. In addition, the apparatus 200 may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure of the chamber C. When a pressure in the chamber C is maintained in a vacuum state, vapor formation between the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 when the cover window 110 and the display panel 130 are laminated may be effectively prevented.
  • Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 100 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 110 having a curved shape to the display panel 130, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized, and product quality may be improved.
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 5 , the display device 300 includes a cover window 310, a panel member 390, and an adhesive layer 320. The cover window 310 includes a flat portion 311 and curved portions 312. The cover window 310 and the adhesive layer 320 are substantially the same as the cover window 110 and adhesive layer 120 of FIG. 1 and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The panel member 390 may include a first panel member 391 that is seated on the flat portion 311. In addition, the panel member 390 may include a second panel member 392 at least a portion of which is seated on the curved portions 312. The panel member 390 may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 includes the display panel 330.
  • In further detail, the display panel 330 includes a first display panel portion 331 that is laminated on the flat portion 311. In addition, the display panel 330 includes second display panel portions 332 that extend from the first display panel portion 331 and are laminated or partially laminated on the curved portions 312. The second display panel portions 332 extend in a curved shape from the first display panel portion 331. Accordingly, since the display device 300 includes the cover window 310 that is curved and the display device 300 displays through a flat portion 311 and a curved portion 312, a larger or maximum active area may be obtained. Further, due to the inward curvature of the cover window 310, the display panel 330 may be smaller in the at least one of a length or a width than the cover window 310. In addition, the display device 300 that is partially curved may be attached to various electronic devices, and may easily display images having various shapes. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the display panel 330 is shorter in width than the cover window 310 as described below in further detail.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7C.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 7A through 7C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The same members as those of FIG. 5 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • Referring to FIGS. 6 through 7C, the apparatus 400 includes a first jig 410, a second jig 420, a driving unit (such as first driving unit 415), and a fixing unit F (for example, first fixing unit 430 and second fixing unit 440). The first jig 410, the second jig 420, the driving unit, and the fixing unit F are similar to the first jig 210, the second jig 220, the driving unit (for example, the second driving unit 225), and the fixing unit (for example, second fixing unit 240), respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit may include the first driving unit 415 and a second driving unit, and the fixing unit F includes the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440. The first driving unit 415, the second driving unit, the first fixing unit 430, and the second fixing unit 440 are substantially the same as the first driving unit, the second driving unit 225, the first fixing unit, and the second fixing unit 240, respectively, as described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. However, it will be assumed that the driving unit including only the first driving unit 415 operates.
  • The apparatus 400 may include a cushion unit 490 provided on or a part of at least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420. In this embodiment, a thickness of the cushion unit 490 may be greater than or equal to 0.5 mm and less than or equal to 3 mm. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 490 is part of a surface of the second jig 420.
  • In FIGS. 6 through 7C, a plurality of cushion units 490 are part of respective end portions of the second jig 420 to face the first jig 410. The cushion units 490 include a first cushion unit 491 and a second cushion unit 492 that are part of a surface of the second jig 420 and spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other. The distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the display panel 330. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the distance S1 between the first cushion unit 491 and the second cushion unit 492 is less than the width of the display panel 330.
  • The cushion units 490 support the display panel 330 and help prevent air bubbles from being formed between the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 when the second jig 420 and the first jig 410 are moved toward each other with the display panel 330 and the cover window 310, respectively, therebetween.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 400 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since the apparatus 400 (such as the second jig 420) includes the cushion unit 490, a defect rate that may increase during lamination of the display panel 330 to the cover window 310 on the curved portions 312 may be reduced.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 6 through 7C.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 400 is similar to that described above. For example, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be manufactured as described above and may be mounted on the first jig 410 and the second jig 420, respectively (see FIG. 7A). Next, the first fixing unit 430 and the second fixing unit 440 respectively fix the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420. When a first absorption pump 432 operates, a first absorption unit 431 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Likewise, when a second absorption pump 442 operates, a second absorption unit 441 is maintained in a vacuum (or near vacuum) state. Accordingly, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are fixed to the first jig 410 and the second jig 420, respectively.
  • In FIGS. 6 through 7C, the first jig 410 is higher than the second jig 420 (for example, in a gravity direction). At least one of the first jig 410 or the second jig 420 then moves towards the other. For example, the first jig 410 may move toward the second jig 420, or the second jig 420 may move toward the first jig 410. In other embodiments, both the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 move closer to each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420. When the first jig 410 moves toward the second jig 420, the first driving unit 415 operates. When the first driving unit 415 continuously operates, a curved surface of the cover window 310 contacts the adhesive layer 320.
  • At first, the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be flat against the second jig 420. Then, when the adhesive layer 320 and the cover window 310 contact each other, both ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved (for example, through contact with the cover window 310 that is curved). Next, a first display panel portion 331 (that is flat) and second display panel portions 332 (that are curved) of the display panel 330 are formed. Accordingly, the first display panel portion 331 and the second display panel portions 332 are formed when the display panel 330 is adhered to the flat portion 311 and the curved portions 312. The cover window 310 may be attached to the display panel 330 through lamination as the first driving unit 415 operates as described above (see FIGS. 5 and 7C). In other embodiments, the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be bent along an outer surface of the second jig 420 when the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are mounted on the second jig 420.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 and the second jig 420 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Since the method accurately laminates the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. In addition, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 9A through 9C are cross-sectional views illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIGS. 8 through 9C, the apparatus 500 includes a first jig 510, a second jig 520, a driving unit M (such as first driving unit 515 and second driving unit 525), and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530). The first jig 510, the second jig 520, the driving unit M, and the fixing unit are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. The driving unit M may include the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525, and the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 530 (including first absorption unit 531 and first absorption pump 532). The first driving unit 515, the second driving unit 525, and the first fixing unit 530 are substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 500 includes a clamping unit 550 that is spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the second jig 520, and supports the display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied. In other embodiments, the clamping unit 550 may be spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from the first jig 510, and supports the cover window 310. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the clamping unit 550 is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520.
  • The clamping unit 550 supports one or more ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 when they are inserted into the clamping unit 550. In FIGS. 8 through 9C, a plurality of clamping units 550 are provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 is less than the at least one of a length or a width of the panel member (for example, display panel 330) when the clamping units 550 are fixing the display panel 330. The panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. Particularly, each of the clamping units 550 is placed at both ends of the cover window 310 in the direction of the at least one of a width or a length of the cover window 310. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that a distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 is less than a width of the display panel 330 and the panel member includes the display panel 330.
  • In FIGS. 8 through 9C, the clamping units 550 face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520, and fix respective ends of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320. The clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 and a second clamping unit 552 that are spaced apart by a set interval (for example, a predetermined interval) from each other.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 500 may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since the apparatus 500 includes the clamping unit 550 to accurately align the display panel 330 and the cover window 310, working efficiency may be improved.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 500 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9A through 9C.
  • First, the cover window 310 is formed, the display panel 330 is formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 is attached to the display panel 330. The cover window 310 may be mounted on the first jig 510 as described above (see FIG. 9A). Next, respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552. For example, the respective ends of the display panel 330 may be fixed by being inserted into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552.
  • Once the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are fixed in this manner, middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). As shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, since a distance S2 between the first clamping unit 551 and the second clamping unit 552 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330, the middle portions of the display panel 330 protrude toward the first jig 510. When the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are fixed, the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be compressed by moving at least one of the first jig 510 or the second jig 520. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 and the second jig 520.
  • When the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 move, the first driving unit 515 and the second driving unit 525 may operate to move the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 closer to each other. The middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 (which are curved downward) then contact the cover window 310. For example, the middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may first contact a portion of the flat portion 311. When the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 continuously move, the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are adhered to the cover window 310 from the flat portion 311 as the first contacting portion to the curved portions 312. That is, the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 contact in an order from the flat portion 311 to the curved portions 312.
  • At some point (for example, after the adhesive layer 320 contacts the flat portion 311), the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330, the display panel 330 may detach from the clamping unit 550, and the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 may move closer to each other to further laminate the display panel 330 to the cover window 310.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 contact each other as described above, a load range applied when the first jig 510 and the second jig 520 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and equal or less than 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and thus the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa, when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. In addition, since the method may accurately laminate the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330, a defect rate may be reduced or minimized. Further, since the method removes air bubbles that may be formed (or prevents air bubbles from being formed) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed, product quality may be improved.
  • According to embodiments of the present invention, since a cover window that is partially curved and a display panel are rapidly and accurately laminated to each other, mass production, high reliability, and high quality may be achieved. In addition, since a display device may be manufactured rapidly, manufacturing time and costs may be reduced.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIGS. 10 and 11 , the apparatus 600 includes a first jig 610, a second jig 620, a driving unit M (including first driving unit 615 and second driving unit 625), a clamping unit 650, and a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630). The first jig 610 and the second jig 620 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625, and the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 630. The first driving unit 615, the second driving unit 625, and the first fixing unit 630 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. The first fixing unit 630 may include a first absorption unit 631 and a first absorption pump 632.
  • The clamping unit 650 may include a first clamping unit 651 and a second clamping unit 652. The first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 600 may include a first linear driving unit 660 and a second linear driving unit 670 which respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 (for example, in a vertical direction with respect to gravity). The first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may be formed similarly and thus, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 may include a first shaft 661 that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 and linearly moves. In one embodiment, the first linear driving unit 660 may include a first driving module 665 that drives the first shaft 661. The first driving module 665 may include, for example, a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 includes a motor. It will be further assumed that the first shaft 661 includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 may include a first elastic unit 663 that surrounds the first shaft 661. The first elastic unit 663 may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 includes a compression spring. The first elastic unit 663 may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 when the first clamping unit 651 moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 by using the apparatus 600 will be described. The cover window 310 and a panel member (for example, display panel 330) may be formed, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be formed on the panel member. The panel member may include at least one of the display panel 330 or the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330. Respective ends of the display panel 330 on which the adhesive layer 320 is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652. Once the display panel 330 is fixed to the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652, middle portions of the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than at least one of a width or a length of the display panel 330, the middle portions may protrude toward the first jig 610. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S3 between the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 is less than a width of the display panel 330.
  • After the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 are disposed in this manner, the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 610 or the second jig 620. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 and the second jig 620.
  • While the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 move in this manner, the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652. The first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 moves.
  • When the second jig 620, the first clamping unit 651, and the second clamping unit 652 are raised in this manner, the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320 may be raised while maintaining their curved states. When a distance between the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652 may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the display panel 330 and the adhesive layer 320. During or after this releasing of the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652, the first linear driving unit 660 and the second linear driving unit 670 may lower the first clamping unit 651 and the second clamping unit 652.
  • Next, the first driving unit 615 and the second driving unit 625 may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 520 may contact the display panel 330). As the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 move closer, the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another (e.g., starting with the flat portion 311). A method of compressing the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be performed in the same manner as that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 and the second jig 620 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 having a curved shape. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved shape to the display panel 330. In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 for manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a method of manufacturing the display device 300 of FIG. 5 according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIGS. 12 and 13 , the apparatus 700 may include a first jig 710, a second jig 720 (including a cushion unit 790), a driving unit M (including first driving unit 715 and second driving unit 725), a clamping unit 750 (including a first clamping unit 751 and a second clamping unit 752), a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730), a first linear driving unit 760, and a second linear driving unit 770. The first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include the first driving unit 715 and the second driving unit 725, and the fixing unit may include the first fixing unit 730. The first driving unit 715, the second driving unit 725, and the first fixing unit 730 (which includes first absorption unit 731 and first absorption pump 732) may be substantially the same as those described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752, respectively. The first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 in a diagonal direction, respectively, with respect to the second jig 720 (and, for example, with respect to a gravity direction). Since the second linear driving unit 770 may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760.
  • In further detail, the first linear driving unit 760 may include a first shaft 761, a first driving module 765, and a first elastic unit 763. The first shaft 761, the first driving module 765, and the first elastic unit 763 may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 660 in FIGS. 10-11 ) except that, the first shaft 761 is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 with respect to the second jig 720.
  • When the first linear driving unit 760 operates, the first driving module 765 may vary a length of the first shaft 761. Since the first driving module 765 and the first shaft 761 are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 as described above, the first clamping unit 751 may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761.
  • For example, when the first driving module 765 operates to diagonally move the first shaft 761 downward with respect to the second jig 720, the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves. Likewise, when the first driving module 765 operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move the first shaft 761 upward with respect to the second jig 720, the first clamping unit 751 may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first shaft 761 moves. The first shaft 761 may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 operates. The first shaft 761 may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 as the first driving module 765 rotates.
  • The cushion unit 790 may be formed in various ways. For example, the cushion unit 790 may be part of an outer surface (e.g., a contacting surface, such as a surface that contacts the cover window 310 or the display panel 330) of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720. In another embodiment, the cushion unit 790 may be part of a portion of such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720. In another embodiment, the cushion unit 790 is part of the apparatus 700 and covers such an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720. For ease of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 790 is part of an entire such outer surface of the second jig 720.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 may be similar to that described above. In further detail, a panel member (for example, display panel 330) and the cover window 310 may be prepared, and then the adhesive layer 320 may be applied to the panel member. The panel member may include the display panel 330 and the TSP as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member includes the display panel 330. The display panel 330 to which the adhesive layer 320 is applied may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752. When the fixing is completed, the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be compressed against one another by moving at least one of the first jig 710 or the second jig 720. A method of compressing the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 may be similar to that described above and thus, a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • When the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 move in this manner, the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may also move. The first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770, respectively. The first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be raised diagonally with respect to the second jig 720.
  • When the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 are raised and then an interval between the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 reaches a preset interval, both ends of the display panel 330 may be released from the clamping unit 750. The display panel 330 may be laminated to the cover window 310 by the adhesive layer 320 beginning from a middle portion of the display panel 330 (corresponding to the flat portion 311 of the cover window 310).
  • During or after the releasing of the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 from the display panel 330, the first linear driving unit 760 and the second linear driving unit 770 may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752. The first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 may be lowered diagonally with respect to the second jig 720. While the first clamping unit 751 and the second clamping unit 752 are lowered, the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 may get closer to each other to compress the display panel 330, the adhesive layer 320, and the cover window 310 against one another. For example, the second jig 720 may contact the display panel 330. A method of adhering the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • When the display panel 330 and the cover window 310 are compressed by moving the first jig 710 and the second jig 720, the cushion unit 790 may spread a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310. In addition, the cushion unit 790 may help prevent the display panel 330 or the cover window 310 from being damaged by partially absorbing a force applied to the display panel 330 and the cover window 310.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 and the second jig 720 compress the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be reduced, and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 are attached to each other, the cover window 310 and the display panel 330 may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • Accordingly, the method may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300. Further, the method may reduce or minimize a defect rate by accurately laminating the cover window 310 having a curved surface to the display panel 330. In addition, the method may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) after the display panel 330 and the curved portions 312 are compressed.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 a according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 14 , the display device 300 a may include a cover window 310 a and a panel member 390 a as described above. In addition, the display device 300 a may include a first adhesive layer 320 a that is disposed between a panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a. The panel member 390 a may include a display panel 330 a and a TSP 340 a as described above. In particular, a second adhesive layer 350 a may be provided between the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a to attach the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • The cover window 310 a may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 a is curved. In particular, the cover window 310 may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R. The cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In addition, the cover window 310 a may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed after the panel member 390 a is attached is convex. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cover window 310 is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 a.
  • The first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of the same material. In further detail, the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may be formed of a transparent material having an adhesive force. For example, the first adhesive layer 320 a and the second adhesive layer 350 a may include an optical clear adhesive (OCA) film or an adhesive material.
  • Accordingly, since the display device 300 a is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 a may be provided on various members.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 15 , the apparatus 400 a may include a first jig 410 a, a second jig 420 a, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 a), and a cushion unit 490 a. At least a portion of the first jig 410 a may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 a. In further detail, the first jig 410 a may have a curved surface on which the cover window 310 a having a curved surface with a set or predetermined curvature radius is seated. In particular, the first jig 410 a may be recessed away from the second jig 420 a.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 a may protrude toward the first jig 410 a to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 a. The outer surface of the second jig 420 a may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 a and a second driving unit 425 a. The first driving unit 415 a may linearly move the first jig 410 a toward the second jig 420 a, and the second driving unit 425 a may linearly move the second jig 420 a toward the first jig 410 a. The first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • In addition, the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 a provided on the first jig 410 a and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 a. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 a. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 a and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • The first fixing unit 430 a may be formed in various ways. For example, the first fixing unit 430 a may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 a may include a first absorption unit 431 a and a first absorption pump 432 a that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 a. In particular, the first fixing unit 430 a is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 a and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 a. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first fixing unit 430 a includes the first absorption unit 431 a and the first absorption pump 432 a.
  • The cushion unit 490 a may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a. In this case, the cushion unit 490 a is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed explanation thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 490 a is provided only on the second jig 420 a and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 a.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 a by using the apparatus 400 a will now be described. First, the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 a is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 a.
  • After the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 410 a. The cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 a. The first absorption pump 432 a may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 a, so that the cover window 310 a may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 a.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a may be disposed on the second jig 420 a. The display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 420 a, and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 410 a.
  • After the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a. The first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 a.
  • When the cover window 310 a, the TSP 340 a, and the display panel 330 a are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a. A protruding portion of the second jig 420 a may first contact the display panel 330 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a may be sequentially laminated from a central portion of the display panel 330 a to both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other, the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • While the process is performed, the cushion unit 490 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a, the TSP 340 a, and the display panel 330 a.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 415 a and the second driving unit 425 a may operate to separate the first jig 410 a and the second jig 420 a. An operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 410 a or the second jig 420 a.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 400 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 410 a, the second jig 420 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 400 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 a may manufacture any type of display device 300 a. In addition, the apparatus 400 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated.
  • FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 16 , the apparatus 500 a includes a first jig 510 a, a second jig 520 a, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 a), and a cushion unit 590 a. In this case, the first jig 510 a, the second jig 520 a, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 a are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 a and a second driving unit 525 a, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 a. The first driving unit 515 a, the second driving unit 525 a, and the first fixing unit 530 a (which includes a first absorption unit 531 a and a first absorption pump 532 a) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 500 a includes a clamping unit 550 a that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a, and supports the panel member 390 a. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the clamping unit 550 a is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 a.
  • The clamping unit 550 a may support one end of the panel member 390 a when the one end of the panel member 390 a is inserted into the clamping unit 550 a. A plurality of the clamping units 550 a may be provided, where a distance between the clamping units 550 a is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 a. The panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance between the plurality of clamping units 550 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a and the panel member 390 a includes the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • In particular, the plurality of clamping units 550 a face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 a, and fix both ends of the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a. The plurality of clamping units 550 a include a first clamping unit 551 a and a second clamping unit 552 a that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 500 a may accurately attach the cover window 310 a having a curved surface to the panel member 390 a, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • In particular, since the apparatus 500 a includes the clamping unit 550 a to accurately align the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a, working efficiency may be improved.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 a by using the apparatus 500 a will now be described with reference to FIG. 16 .
  • The cover window 310 a may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 a may be formed, and then the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a. The cover window 310 a may be mounted on the first jig 510 a as described above. The cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 a. A first absorption pump 532 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 531 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 510 a.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 a. The display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 520 a, and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 510 a. In particular, respective ends of the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a. For example, the respective ends of panel member 390 a may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a as described above.
  • Once the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a are fixed in this manner, portions of the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance between the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a, the portions of the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a may protrude toward the first jig 510 a.
  • When the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, the first adhesive layer 320 a, and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first adhesive layer 320 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a.
  • When the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a move, the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to move the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a closer to each other.
  • The upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a first contact the cover window 310 a. When the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a continuously move, the display panel 330 a, the second adhesive layer 350 a, the TSP 340 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be laminated to the cover window 310 a beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 a toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other, the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a move as described above, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 a and the second clamping unit 552 a do not move.
  • The cushion unit 590 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed and laminated.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 515 a and the second driving unit 525 a may operate to separate the first jig 510 a and the second jig 520 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 510 a or the second jig 520 a.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 500 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 510 a, the second jig 520 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 500 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 500 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 17 , the apparatus 600 a includes a first jig 610 a, a second jig 620 a, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 a, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 a), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 a. The first jig 610 a, the second jig 620 a, the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 a, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 a and a second driving unit 625 a, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 a. The first driving unit 615 a, the second driving unit 625 a, and the first fixing unit 630 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In particular, the first fixing unit 630 a may include a first absorption pump 632 a and a first absorption unit 631 a.
  • The clamping unit 650 a may include a first clamping unit 651 a and a second clamping unit 652 a. The first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 600 a may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 a and a second linear driving unit 670 a that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a. In particular, the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 a moves. The first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 a.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first shaft 661 a that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 a and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 a. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first driving module 665 a that drives the first shaft 661 a. The first driving module 665 a may include a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 a includes a motor. It will be further assumed that the first shaft 661 a includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 a rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 a may include a first elastic unit 663 a that surrounds the first shaft 661 a. The first elastic unit 663 a may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 a includes a compression spring.
  • The first elastic unit 663 a may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 a as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 a when the first clamping unit 651 a moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 a by using the apparatus 600 a will be described. The cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 a may include at least one of the display panel 330 a or the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • Next, the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 610 a. The cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 a. A first absorption pump 632 a may absorb air of a first absorption unit 631 a to fix the cover window 310 a to the outer surface of the first jig 610 a.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 a. The display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 620 a and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 610 a. In particular, the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 a and an end of the TSP 340 a may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • Next, the first adhesive layer 320 a may be formed on the TSP 340 a. Respective ends of the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a on which the first adhesive layer 320 a is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • Once the panel member 390 a is fixed to the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a, one portion of the panel member 390 a may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance between the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 a, the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 a. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance between the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a.
  • After the panel member 390 a is disposed in this manner, the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a.
  • While the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a move in this manner, the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a. In particular, the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 a moves.
  • When the second jig 620 a, the first clamping unit 651 a, and the second clamping unit 652 a are raised in this manner, the panel member 390 a may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 a.
  • During or after this releasing of the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a, the first linear driving unit 660 a and the second linear driving unit 670 a may lower the first clamping unit 651 a and the second clamping unit 652 a.
  • Next, the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 a may contact panel member 390 a). As the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a move closer, the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other. A method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other, the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • The cushion unit 690 a may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated due to compression.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 615 a and the second driving unit 625 a may operate to separate the first jig 610 a and the second jig 620 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 610 a or the second jig 620 a.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 600 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 610 a, the second jig 620 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 600 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 600 a may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 600 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 600 a may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 a for manufacturing the display device 300 a of FIG. 14 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 18 , the apparatus 700 a may include a first jig 710 a, a second jig 720 a, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 a, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 a), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 a. The first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 a and a second driving unit 725 a, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 a. The first driving unit 715 a, the second driving unit 725 a, and the first fixing unit 730 a (which includes first absorption unit 731 a and first absorption pump 732 a) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In addition, the clamping unit 750 a may include a first clamping unit 751 a and a second clamping unit 752 a. The first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 a and a second linear driving unit 770 a, and the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a, respectively. In particular, the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 a may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 a, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 a.
  • In further detail, the first linear driving unit 760 a may include a first shaft 761 a, a first driving module 765 a, and a first elastic unit 763 a. The first shaft 761 a, the first driving module 765 a, and the first elastic unit 763 a may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12-13 ). The first shaft 761 a is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 a.
  • In particular, when the first linear driving unit 760 a operates, the first driving module 765 a may vary a length of the first shaft 761 a. Since the first driving module 765 a and the first shaft 761 a are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 a as described above, the first clamping unit 751 a may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 a.
  • For example, when the first driving module 765 a operates to diagonally move the first shaft 761 a downward with respect to the second jig 720 a, the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
  • When the first driving module 765 a operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move the first shaft 761 a upward with respect to the second jig 720 a, the first clamping unit 751 a may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first shaft 761 a moves.
  • The first shaft 761 a may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 a operates. In particular, the first shaft 761 a may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 a as the first driving module 765 a rotates.
  • The cushion unit 790 a may be formed in various ways. For example, the cushion unit 790 a may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a. For ease of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 790 a is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 a.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 a may be similar to that described above. In further detail, the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 a may include the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 a includes both the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a.
  • After the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 a may be disposed on the first jig 710 a. The cover window 310 a may be formed to have a curved surface having a predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 a. A first absorption pump 732 a may operate to absorb air of a first absorption unit 731 a so that the cover window 310 a is fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 710 a.
  • When the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 a and the TSP 340 a may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 a, and the first adhesive layer 320 a may be coated on the TSP 340 a.
  • Next, the TSP 340 a and the display panel 330 a may be disposed on the second jig 720 a. The display panel 330 a may be disposed to face the second jig 720, and the TSP 340 a may be disposed to face the first jig 710 a. The panel member 390 a manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a. In further detail, since a distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 a, an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 a may protrude toward the first jig 710 a. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance between the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a is less than a width of the panel member 390 a. When the fixing is completed, the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a. A method of compressing the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • When the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a move in this manner, the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may also move. In particular, the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a, respectively. The first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be raised diagonally.
  • When the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a are raised and then an interval between the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a reaches a preset interval, both ends of the panel member 390 a may be released. The panel member 390 a may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 a beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
  • After the releasing of the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a, the first linear driving unit 760 a and the second linear driving unit 770 a may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a. The first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a may be lowered diagonally.
  • While the first clamping unit 751 a and the second clamping unit 752 a are lowered, the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a. In this case, a method of adhering the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • When the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a are compressed by moving the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a as described above, the cushion unit 790 a may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a. In addition, the cushion unit 790 a may help prevent the panel member 390 a or the cover window 310 a from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 a and the cover window 310 a.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 a and the display panel 330 a contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a compress the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be reduced, and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are attached to each other, the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • After the process is completed, the first driving unit 715 a and the second driving unit 725 a may operate to separate the first jig 710 a and the second jig 720 a. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 a from the first jig 710 a or the second jig 720 a.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 700 a may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 710 a, the second jig 720 a, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 700 a may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 a and the panel member 390 a are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 700 a may manufacture the display device 300 a having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 700 a may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 a and the cover window 310 a having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 700 a may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 a and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 b according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 19 , the display device 300 b may include a cover window 310 b and a panel member 390 b as described above. In addition, the display device 300 b may include a first adhesive layer 320 b that is disposed between the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b. The panel member 390 b may include a display panel 330 b and a TSP 340 b as described above. In particular, a second adhesive layer 350 b may be provided between the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b to attach the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • At least a portion of the cover window 310 b may be curved. The cover window 310 b may be formed such that a surface on which an image or text is displayed is curved after then panel member 390 b is attached. In particular, the cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius. In some embodiments, the cover window 310 b may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in at least one of a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In other embodiments, the cover window 310 b may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 (e.g., there may be a separate curvature radius of each portion or curved surface of the cover window 310 b). However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cover window 310 b is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction.
  • The first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of the same material. In further detail, the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may be formed of an adhesive and transparent material. For example, the first adhesive layer 320 b and the second adhesive layer 350 b may include an optical clear adhesive film (OCA film) or an adhesive material.
  • Accordingly, since the display device 300 b is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 b may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 20 , the apparatus 400 b may include a first jig 410 b, a second jig 420 b, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 b), and a cushion unit 490 b. An outer surface of the first jig 410 b on which the cover window 310 b is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 b contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 b. In further detail, the first jig 410 b may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 b. In particular, the first jig 410 b may be formed by being recessed away from the second jig 420 b.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 b may protrude toward the first jig 410 b to correspond to or engage with a recessed portion of the first jig 410 b (e.g., the first jig 410 b may have a recessed outer surface). The outer surface of the second jig 420 b may be at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 b and a second driving unit 425 b. The first driving unit 415 b may linearly move the first jig 410 b toward the second jig 420 b, and the second driving unit 425 b may linearly move the second jig 420 b toward the first jig 410 b. The first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • In addition, the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 b provided on the first jig 410 b and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 b. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 b. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 b and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • The first fixing unit 430 b may be formed in various ways. For example, the first fixing unit 430 b may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 b may include a first absorption unit 431 b and a first absorption pump 432 b that is connected to the first absorption unit 431 b. In particular, the first fixing unit 430 b is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 b and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 b. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first fixing unit 430 b includes the first absorption unit 431 b and the first absorption pump 432 b.
  • The cushion unit 490 b may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b. In this case, the cushion unit 490 b is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 490 b is provided only on the second jig 420 b and is integrally formed on an outer surface of the second jig 420 b.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 b by using the apparatus 400 b will now be described. First, the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 b is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the panel member 390 b may adhere the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b by using the second adhesive layer 350 b.
  • After the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 b may be disposed on the first jig 410 b. The cover window 310 b may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 b. The first absorption pump 432 b may operate to absorb (e.g., evacuate or vacuum) air out of the first absorption unit 431 b, so that the cover window 310 b may be fixed to the outer surface of the first jig 410 b.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b may be disposed on the second jig 420 b. The display panel 330 b may be disposed to face the second jig 420 b, and the TSP 340 b may be disposed to face the first jig 410 b.
  • After the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b. The first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 b.
  • When the cover window 310 b, the TSP 340 b, and the display panel 330 b are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b. A protruding portion of the second jig 420 b may first contact the display panel 330 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 b to both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other, the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • While the process is performed, the cushion unit 490 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 415 b and the second driving unit 425 b may operate to separate the first jig 410 b and the second jig 420 b. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 b from the first jig 410 b or the second jig 420 b.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 400 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 410 b, the second jig 420 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 400 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 b may manufacture any type of display device 300 b. In addition, the apparatus 400 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated.
  • FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 21 , the apparatus 500 b includes a first jig 510 b, a second jig 520 b, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 b), and a cushion unit 590 b. In this case, the first jig 510 b, the second jig 520 b, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 b are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 b and a second driving unit 525 b, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 b. The first driving unit 515 b, the second driving unit 525 b, and the first fixing unit 530 b (which includes a first absorption unit 531 b and a first absorption pump 532 b) are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 500 b includes a clamping unit 550 b that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b, and supports the panel member 390 b. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the clamping unit 550 b is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 b.
  • The clamping unit 550 b may support one end of the panel member 390 b when the one end of the panel member 390 b is inserted into the clamping unit 550 b. A plurality of the clamping units 550 b may be provided, where a distance S4 between the clamping units 550 b is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 b. The panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S4 between the plurality of clamping units 550 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b and the panel member 390 b includes the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • In particular, the plurality of clamping units 550 b face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 b, and fix both ends of the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b. The plurality of clamping units 550 b include a first clamping unit 551 b and a second clamping unit 552 b that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 500 b may accurately attach the cover window 310 b having a curved surface to the panel member 390 b, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • In particular, since the apparatus 500 b includes the clamping unit 550 b to accurately align the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b, working efficiency may be improved.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 b by using the apparatus 500 b will now be described with reference to FIG. 21 .
  • The cover window 310 b may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 b may be formed, and then the TSP 340 b and the display panel 330 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b. The cover window 310 b may be mounted on the first jig 510 b as described above.
  • Next, respective ends of the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is attached are fixed to the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b. For example, the respective ends of panel member 390 b may be fixed by being inserted into grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b as described above.
  • Once the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b are fixed in this manner, portions of the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S4 between the first clamping unit 551 b and the second clamping unit 552 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b, the portions of the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b may protrude toward the first jig 510 b.
  • When the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b are fixed as described above, the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, the first adhesive layer 320 b, and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 b or the second jig 520 b. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first adhesive layer 320 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b.
  • When the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b move, the first driving unit 515 b and the second driving unit 525 b may operate to move the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b closer to each other.
  • The upwardly curved portions of the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b first contact the cover window 310 b. When the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b continuously move, the display panel 330 b, the second adhesive layer 350 b, the TSP 340 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be laminated to the cover window 310 b beginning from contact portions with the cover window 310 b toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 510 b and the second jig 520 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other, the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • The cushion unit 590 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed and laminated.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 500 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 510 b, the second jig 520 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 500 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture any type of display device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 500 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 22 , the apparatus 600 b includes a first jig 610 b, a second jig 620 b, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 b, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 b), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 690 b. The first jig 610 b, the second jig 620 b, the linear driving unit L, the clamping unit 650 b, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 b and a second driving unit 625 b, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 b. The first driving unit 615 b, the second driving unit 625 b, and the first fixing unit 630 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In particular, the first fixing unit 630 b may include a first absorption pump 632 b and a first absorption unit 631 b.
  • The clamping unit 650 b may include a first clamping unit 651 b and a second clamping unit 652 b. The first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 600 b may include a linear driving unit L that includes a first linear driving unit 660 b and a second linear driving unit 670 b that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. The first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may be formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 b.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first shaft 661 b that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 b and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 b. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first driving module 665 b that drives the first shaft 661 b. The first driving module 665 b may include a cylinder or a motor. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 b includes a motor. It will be further assumed that the first shaft 661 b includes a ball screw that is lowered or raised as the first driving module 665 b rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 b may include a first elastic unit 663 b that surrounds the first shaft 661 b. The first elastic unit 663 b may include a compression spring, and may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 b includes a compression spring.
  • The first elastic unit 663 b may surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 b as described above and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 b when the first clamping unit 651 b moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 b by using the apparatus 600 b will be described. The cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 b may include at least one of the display panel 330 b or the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • The display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 b, and then the first adhesive layer 320 b may be formed on the TSP 340 b. Respective ends of the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b on which the first adhesive layer 320 b is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
  • Once the panel member 390 b is fixed to the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b, one portion of the panel member 390 b may be curved upward (for example, with respect to a gravity direction). In further detail, since a distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b, the upwardly curved portion may protrude toward the first jig 610 b. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S5 between the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b.
  • After the panel member 390 b is disposed in this manner, the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 b or the second jig 620 b. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving both the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b.
  • While the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b move in this manner, the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b. In particular, the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 b moves.
  • When the second jig 620 b, the first clamping unit 651 b, and the second clamping unit 652 b are raised in this manner, the panel member 390 b may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b reaches a set distance (for example, a predetermined distance), the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b may release from (for example, reduce their clamping force from) the panel member 390 b.
  • During or after this releasing of the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b, the first linear driving unit 660 b and the second linear driving unit 670 b may lower the first clamping unit 651 b and the second clamping unit 652 b.
  • Next, the first driving unit 615 b and the second driving unit 625 b may continuously operate to bring the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b closer (for example, adjacent) to each other (for example, the second jig 620 b may contact panel member 390 b). As the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b move closer, the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other. A method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 b and the second jig 620 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other, the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • The cushion unit 690 b may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated due to compression.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 600 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 610 b, the second jig 620 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 600 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 600 b may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 600 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 600 b may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 b for manufacturing the display device 300 b of FIG. 19 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 23 , the apparatus 700 b may include a first jig 710 b, a second jig 720 b, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 b, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 b), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 b. The first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 b and a second driving unit 725 b, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 b. The first driving unit 715 b, the second driving unit 725 b, and the first fixing unit 730 b (which includes first absorption unit 731 b and first absorption pump 732 b) may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In addition, the clamping unit 750 b may include a first clamping unit 751 b and a second clamping unit 752 b. The first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 b and a second linear driving unit 770 b, and the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b, respectively. In particular, the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 b may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 b, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 b.
  • In further detail, the first linear driving unit 760 b may include a first shaft 761 b, a first driving module 765 b, and a first elastic unit 763 b. The first shaft 761 b, the first driving module 765 b, and the first elastic unit 763 b may be formed in a similar manner to those described above (such as the first linear driving unit 760 in FIGS. 12-13 ). The first shaft 761 b is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 b.
  • In particular, when the first linear driving unit 760 b operates, the first driving module 765 b may vary a length of the first shaft 761 b. Since the first driving module 765 b and the first shaft 761 b are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 b as described above, the first clamping unit 751 b may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 b.
  • For example, when the first driving module 765 b operates to diagonally move the first shaft 761 b downward with respect to the second jig 720 b, the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
  • When the first driving module 765 b operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move the first shaft 761 b upward with respect to the second jig 720 b, the first clamping unit 751 b may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first shaft 761 b moves.
  • The first shaft 761 b may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 b operates. In particular, the first shaft 761 b may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 b as the first driving module 765 b rotates.
  • The cushion unit 790 b may be formed in various ways. For example, the cushion unit 790 b may be provided on an outer surface of at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b. For ease of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit 790 b is formed on an entire outer surface of the second jig 720 b.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 b may be similar to that described above. In further detail, the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 b may include the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 b includes both the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b.
  • When the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 b and the TSP 340 b may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 b, and the first adhesive layer 320 b may be coated on the TSP 340 b.
  • The panel member 390 b manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b. In further detail, since a distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than at least one of a width or a length of the panel member 390 b, an upwardly curved portion of the panel member 390 b may protrude toward the first jig 710 b. In this case, it will be assumed that the distance S6 between the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b is less than a width of the panel member 390 b. When the fixing is completed, the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 b or the second jig 720 b. A method of compressing the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • When the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b move in this manner, the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may also move. In particular, the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b, respectively. The first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be raised diagonally.
  • When the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b are raised and then an interval between the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b reaches a preset interval, both ends of the panel member 390 b may be released. The panel member 390 b may be sequentially adhered to the cover window 310 b beginning from a protruding portion toward both end portions.
  • After the releasing of the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b, the first linear driving unit 760 b and the second linear driving unit 770 b may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b. The first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b may be lowered diagonally.
  • While the first clamping unit 751 b and the second clamping unit 752 b are lowered, the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b. In this case, a method of adhering the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • When the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b are compressed by moving the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b as described above, the cushion unit 790 b may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b. In addition, the cushion unit 790 b may help prevent the panel member 390 b or the cover window 310 b from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 b and the cover window 310 b.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 b and the display panel 330 b contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 b and the second jig 720 b compress the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be reduced, and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are attached to each other, the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 700 b may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 710 b, the second jig 720 b, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 700 b may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 b and the panel member 390 b are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 700 b may manufacture the display device 300 b having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 700 b may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the display panel 330 b and the cover window 310 b having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 700 b may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated after the display panel 330 b and the curved portions are compressed.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 c according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 24 , the display device 300 c may include a cover window 310 c and a panel member 390 c. The panel member 390 c may include at least one of a TSP 340 c or a display panel 330 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 c includes both the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c.
  • The panel member 390 c may include a first adhesive layer 320 c, the TSP 340 c, a second adhesive layer 350 c, and the display panel 330 c. In particular, the first adhesive layer 320 c, the TSP 340 c, the second adhesive layer 350 c, and the display panel 330 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • At least a portion of the cover window 310 c may be curved. In further detail, a middle portion of the cover window 310 c may be flat and both ends of the middle portion may be curved. The cover window 310 c may be formed of a glass material or a plastic material as described above. In particular, the cover window 310 c may be formed such that a surface to which the display panel 330 c is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
  • In the display device 300 c formed as described above, the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c and the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • The TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be attached to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 c. In further detail, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be provided on a protruding portion, instead of a recessed portion, of the curved cover window 310 c.
  • Accordingly, the display device 300 c shaped as described above may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 25 , the apparatus 400 c may include a first jig 410 c, a second jig 420 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 c), and a cushion unit 490 c. At least a portion of the first jig 410 c may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c. In further detail, an outer surface of the first jig 410 c on which the cover window 310 c is seated may be the same as or similar in shape to an outer surface of the cover window 310 c seated on the outer surface of the first jig 410 c. In particular, the first jig 410 c may protrude toward the second jig 420 c.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 c may be recessed away from the first jig 410 c to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 c.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 c and a second driving unit 425 c. The first driving unit 415 c may linearly move the first jig 410 c toward the second jig 420 c, and the second driving unit 425 c may linearly move the second jig 420 c toward the first jig 410 c. The first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • In addition, the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 c provided on the first jig 410 c and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 c. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 c. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 c and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • The first fixing unit 430 c may be formed in various ways. For example, the first fixing unit 430 c may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 c may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit as described above. In particular, the first fixing unit 430 c is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 c and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first fixing unit 430 c includes an adhesive member and is provided on an outer surface of a first cushion unit 493 c.
  • The cushion unit 490 c may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c. A size of the cushion unit 490 c may be less than a size of at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c. In further detail, the cushion unit 490 c may be disposed only on a contact portion with at least one of the cover window 310 c or the panel member 390 c, and may be disposed to extend beyond the contact portion. The cushion unit 490 c may be the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The cushion unit 490 c may include the first cushion unit 493 c that is provided on a surface of the first jig 410 c, and a second cushion unit 491 c that is provided on a surface of the second jig 420 c. The first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may be integrally formed and respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c. In addition, a plurality of the first cushion units 493 c and the second cushion units 491 c may be formed, and the plurality of first cushion units 493 c and the plurality of second cushion units 491 c may be provided on an outer surface of the first jig 410 c and an outer surface of the second jig 420 c, respectively, and spaced apart from each other. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c are respectively provided on the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 c by using the apparatus 400 c will now be described. First, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • After the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 410 c. The cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed to the first fixing unit 430 c. In particular, a size of the first fixing unit 430 c may be less than a size of the cover window 310 c.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c may be disposed on the second jig 420 c. The display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 420 c, and the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 410 c.
  • After the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c. The first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • When the panel member 390 c is completely disposed as described above, the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • While the process is performed, the first cushion unit 493 c and the second cushion unit 491 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 415 c and the second driving unit 425 c may operate to separate the first jig 410 c and the second jig 420 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 410 c or the second jig 420 c.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 400 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 410 c, the second jig 420 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 400 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a lamination process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c. In addition, the apparatus 400 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 26 , the apparatus 500 c may include a first jig 510 c, a second jig 520 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 c), a cushion unit 590 c, and a clamping unit 550 c. In this case, the first jig 510 c, the second jig 520 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 c (including a first cushion unit 593 c and a second cushion unit 591 c) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The clamping unit 550 c may include a first clamping unit 551 c and a second clamping unit 552 c. The first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 c. In addition, the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 c by using the apparatus 500 c will now be described. First, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • After the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 510 c. The cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by a first fixing unit 530 c.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 c. The display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 520 c, and the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 510 c. In particular, the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c.
  • After the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c. The first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • When the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 c and a second driving unit 525 c. A flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c, and curved ends of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c contact each other as described above, a load range applied when the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c move as described above, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 c and the second clamping unit 552 c do not move.
  • While the process is performed, the first cushion unit 593 c and the second cushion unit 591 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 515 c and the second driving unit 525 c may operate to separate the first jig 510 c and the second jig 520 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 510 c or the second jig 520 c.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 500 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 510 c, the second jig 520 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 500 c may include a pressure adjustment unit for adjusting a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c. In addition, the apparatus 500 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 27 , the apparatus 600 c may include a first jig 610 c, a second jig 620 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 c), a cushion unit 690 c, a clamping unit 650 c, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, the first jig 610 c, the second jig 620 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 c (including a first cushion unit 693 c and a second cushion unit 691 c), and the clamping unit 650 c are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 c, and a second linear driving unit 670 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 c. In particular, the first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 c moves (e.g., in a moving direction of the second jig 620 c). The first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 c.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first shaft 661 c that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 c and linearly moves. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first driving module 665 c that drives the first shaft 661 c. The first driving module 665 c may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 c includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that the first shaft 661 c includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 c rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 c may include a first elastic unit 663 c that surrounds the first shaft 661 c. The first elastic unit 663 c may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 c includes a compression spring.
  • The first elastic unit 663 c may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 c as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 c when the first clamping unit 651 c moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 c by using the apparatus 600 c will now be described. First, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • After the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 610 c. The cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 c. In addition, the cover window 310 c may be disposed such that a protruding portion faces the second jig 620 c.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 c. The display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 620 c, and the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 610 c. In particular, the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c. In addition, a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c may be disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c, or may be disposed adjacent to the cover window 310 c. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that a central portion of the display panel 330 c and a central portion of the TSP 340 c are disposed adjacent to a recessed portion of the second jig 620 c.
  • After the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c. The first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c. In another embodiment, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c.
  • When the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 c and a second driving unit 625 c. The cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may sequentially contact and laminated beginning from a flat portion of the cover window 310 c toward both ends of the panel member 390 c.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c move as described above, the first clamping unit 651 c and the second clamping unit 652 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c move. The first linear driving unit 660 c and the second linear driving unit 670 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
  • While the process is performed, the first cushion unit 693 c and the second cushion unit 691 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 615 c and the second driving unit 625 c may operate to separate the first jig 610 c and the second jig 620 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 610 c or the second jig 620 c.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 600 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 610 c, the second jig 620 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 600 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 600 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c. In addition, the apparatus 600 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 c for manufacturing the display device 300 c of FIG. 24 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 28 , the apparatus 700 c may include a first jig 710 c, a second jig 720 c, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 c), a cushion unit 790 c, a clamping unit 750 c, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, the first jig 710 c, the second jig 720 c, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 c, the clamping unit 750 c, and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 c that is provided on a first clamping unit 751 c and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 c, and a second linear driving unit 770 c that is provided on a second clamping unit 752 c and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 c. The first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c in a diagonal direction. In particular, the first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 c.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 c by using the apparatus 700 c will now be described. First, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 c is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 c.
  • After the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 c may be disposed on the first jig 710 c. The cover window 310 c may be adhered and fixed by the first adhesive layer 320 c.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 c as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 c. The display panel 330 c may be disposed to face the second jig 720 c, and the TSP 340 c may be disposed to face the first jig 710 c. In particular, the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 c and an end of the TSP 340 c may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c. The display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c.
  • After the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c. The first adhesive layer 320 c may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 c. In another embodiment, the first adhesive layer 320 c may be coated on the TSP 340 c before the display panel 330 c and the TSP 340 c are disposed on the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c as described above.
  • When the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 c and a second driving unit 725 c. A flat portion of the cover window 310 c may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 c, and both end portions of the cover window 310 c may sequentially contact the first adhesive layer 320 c to be laminated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c compress the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be reduced, and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are attached to each other, the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c move as described above, the first clamping unit 751 c and the second clamping unit 752 c may fix the TSP 340 c and the display panel 330 c while linearly moving as the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c move. The first linear driving unit 760 c and the second linear driving unit 770 c may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
  • While the process is performed, a first cushion unit 793 c and a second cushion unit 791 c may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 c, the TSP 340 c, and the display panel 330 c.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 715 c and the second driving unit 725 c may operate to separate the first jig 710 c and the second jig 720 c. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 c from the first jig 710 c or the second jig 720 c.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 700 c may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 710 c, the second jig 720 c, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 700 c may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 700 c may manufacture any type of display device 300 c. In addition, the apparatus 700 c may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c when the cover window 310 c and the panel member 390 c are laminated.
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 d according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 29 , the display device 300 d may include a cover window 310 d and a panel member 390 d as described above. In addition, the display device 300 d may include a first adhesive layer 320 d that is disposed between the panel member 390 d and the cover window 310 d. The panel member 390 d may include a display panel 330 d and a TSP 340 d as described above. In particular, a second adhesive layer 350 d may be provided between the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d to attach the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d.
  • The cover window 310 d may be formed such that at least a portion of the cover window 310 d is curved. In particular, the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 d is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is curved. In particular, the cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a curvature radius of R. The cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius in a longitudinal direction or a width direction. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cover window 310 d is formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius and the curved surface is formed in a width direction of the cover window 310 d.
  • In particular, the cover window 310 d may be formed such that a convex portion of the cover window 310 d faces the first adhesive layer 320 d. The TSP 340 d, the second adhesive layer 350 d, and the display panel 330 d may be attached and fixed to a convex outer surface of the cover window 310 d on the first adhesive layer 320 d.
  • Accordingly, since the display device 300 d is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radius, the display device 300 d may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 30 , the apparatus 400 d may include a first jig 410 d, a second jig 420 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 d), and a cushion unit 490 d (including a first cushion unit 493 d and a second cushion unit 491 d). An outer surface of the first jig 410 d on which the cover window 310 d is seated may be the same as or similar to an outer surface of the cover window 310 d contacting the first jig 410 d. In further detail, the first jig 410 d may have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius to correspond to the cover window 310 d. In particular, the first jig 410 d may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 d.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be recessed away from the first jig 410 d to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 d. The outer surface of the second jig 420 d may be a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 d and a second driving unit 425 d. The first driving unit 415 d may linearly move the first jig 410 d toward the second jig 420 d, and the second driving unit 425 d may linearly move the second jig 420 d toward the first jig 410 d. The first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • In addition, the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 d provided on the first jig 410 d and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 d. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 d. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 d and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • The first fixing unit 430 d may be formed in various ways. For example, the first fixing unit 430 d may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 d may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit. In particular, the first fixing unit 430 d is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 d and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first fixing unit 430 d includes an adhesive member.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 d by using the apparatus 400 d will now be described. First, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • After the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 410 d. The cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 d. The first fixing unit 430 d may adhere and fix the cover window 310 d.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d may be disposed on the second jig 420 d. The display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 420 d, and the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 410 d.
  • After the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d. The first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • When the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d. A protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d, and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • While the process is performed, the cushion unit 490 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 415 d and the second driving unit 425 d may operate to separate the first jig 410 d and the second jig 420 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 410 d or the second jig 420 d.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 400 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 410 d, the second jig 420 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 400 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d. In addition, the apparatus 400 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 31 , the apparatus 500 d may include a first jig 510 d, a second jig 520 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 d), a cushion unit 590 d, and a clamping unit 550 d. In this case, the first jig 510 d, the second jig 520 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 d (including a first cushion unit 593 d and a second cushion unit 591 d) are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The clamping unit 550 d may include a first clamping unit 551 d and a second clamping unit 552 d. The first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d may be disposed to face each other on a side surface of the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are disposed to face each other on a side surface of the second jig 520 d. In addition, the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d are formed in the same or similar manner as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 d by using the apparatus 500 d will now be described. First, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • After the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 510 d. The cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 510 d. The cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 530 d.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 520 d. The display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 520 d, and the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 510 d. The display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d.
  • After the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d. The first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • When the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 515 d and a second driving unit 525 d. A protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d, and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are adhered to each other as described above, a load range applied when the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d move as described above, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be fixed while the first clamping unit 551 d and the second clamping unit 552 d do not move.
  • While the process is performed, the first cushion unit 593 d and the second cushion unit 591 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 515 d and the second driving unit 525 d may operate to separate the first jig 510 d and the second jig 520 d.
  • The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 510 d or the second jig 520 d.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 500 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 510 d, the second jig 520 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 500 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d. In addition, the apparatus 500 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 32 , the apparatus 600 d may include a first jig 610 d, a second jig 620 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 d), a cushion unit 690 d, a clamping unit 650 d, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, the first jig 610 d, the second jig 620 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 690 d, and the clamping unit 650 d are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 d that is provided on a first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d, and a second linear driving unit 670 d that is provided on a second clamping unit 652 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 652 d. In particular, the first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d in the same direction as a direction in which the second jig 620 d moves. The first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be formed in the same or similar manner. For convenience of description, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 d.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first shaft 661 d that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 d. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first driving module 665 d that drives the first shaft 661 d. The first driving module 665 d may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 d includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that the first shaft 661 d includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 d rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 d may include a first elastic unit 663 d that surrounds the first shaft 661 d. The first elastic unit 663 d may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 d includes a compression spring.
  • The first elastic unit 663 d may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 d as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 d when the first clamping unit 651 d moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 d by using the apparatus 600 d will now be described. First, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • After the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 610 d. The cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 610 d. The cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 630 d.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 620 d. The display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 620 d, and the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 610 d. In particular, the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into a first clamping unit 651 d and a second clamping unit 652 d.
  • The display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that at least one portion protrudes more than other portions toward the cover window 310 d or toward the second jig 620 d. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that at least one portion of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d protrudes more than other portions toward the second jig 620 d.
  • After the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d. The first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • When the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 615 d and a second driving unit 625 d. A protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d, and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d move as described above, the first clamping unit 651 d and the second clamping unit 652 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d move. The first linear driving unit 660 d and the second linear driving unit 670 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
  • While the process is performed, a first cushion unit 693 d and a second cushion unit 691 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 615 d and the second driving unit 625 d may operate to separate the first jig 610 d and the second jig 620 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 610 d or the second jig 620 d.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 600 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 610 d, the second jig 620 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 600 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 600 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d. In addition, the apparatus 600 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 d for manufacturing the display device 300 d of FIG. 29 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 33 , the apparatus 700 d may include a first jig 710 d, a second jig 720 d, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 d), a cushion unit 790 d, a clamping unit 750 d, and a linear driving unit L. In this case, the first jig 710 d, the second jig 720 d, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, the cushion unit 790 d, the clamping unit 750 d, and the linear driving unit L are the same as or similar to those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 d that is provided on the first clamping unit 751 d and linearly moves the first clamping unit 751 d, and a second linear driving unit 770 d that is provided on the second clamping unit 752 d and linearly moves the second clamping unit 752 d. The first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may respectively linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d in a diagonal direction. In particular, the first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d such that movement directions of the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d form angles with respect to a movement direction of the second jig 720 d.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 d by using the apparatus 700 d will now be described. First, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 d is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d may be adhered to each other by using the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • After the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 d may be disposed on the first jig 710 d. The cover window 310 d may be formed to have a curved surface having a set or predetermined curvature radius of R as described above, and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 710 d. The cover window 310 d may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 730 d.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 d as described above may be disposed on the second jig 720 d. The display panel 330 d may be disposed to face the second jig 720 d, and the TSP 340 d may be disposed to face the first jig 710 d. In particular, the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be stacked, and an end of the display panel 330 d and an end of the TSP 340 d may be fixed by being inserted into the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d.
  • The display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are lower in position than other portions due to the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d. In other embodiments, the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d may be disposed such that central portions are higher in position than other portions. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that central portions of the display panel 330 d and the TSP 340 d are lower in position than other portions.
  • After the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 d may be coated on the TSP 340 d. The first adhesive layer 320 d may be formed of the same or similar material as that of the second adhesive layer 350 d.
  • When the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d may be moved toward each other by driving a first driving unit 715 d and a second driving unit 725 d. A protruding portion of the cover window 310 d may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 d, and the first adhesive layer 320 d and the cover window 310 d may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 d toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d compress the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be reduced, and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are attached to each other, the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • In addition, when the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d move as described above, the first clamping unit 751 d and the second clamping unit 752 d may fix the TSP 340 d and the display panel 330 d while linearly moving as the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d move. The first linear driving unit 760 d and the second linear driving unit 770 d may be controlled based on a linear movement of at least one of the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
  • While the process is performed, a first cushion unit 793 d and a second cushion unit 791 d may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 d, the TSP 340 d, and the display panel 330 d.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 715 d and the second driving unit 725 d may operate to separate the first jig 710 d and the second jig 720 d. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 d from the first jig 710 d or the second jig 720 d.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 700 d may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 710 d, the second jig 720 d, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 700 d may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after a process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 700 d may manufacture any type of display device 300 d. In addition, the apparatus 700 d may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d when the cover window 310 d and the panel member 390 d are laminated.
  • FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a display device 300 e according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 34 , the display device 300 e may include a cover window 310 e and a panel member 390 e as described above. In addition, the display device 300 e may include a first adhesive layer 320 e that is disposed between the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e. The panel member 390 e may include a display panel 330 e and a TSP 340 e as described above. In particular, a second adhesive layer 350 e may be provided between the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e to attach the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • At least a portion of the cover window 310 e may be curved. The cover window 310 e may be formed such that a surface to which the panel member 390 e is attached and on which an image or text is displayed is concave.
  • The cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least one curved surface having a curvature radius. In some embodiments, the cover window 310 e may be formed to have a first curved surface having a curvature radius of R1, a second curved surface having a curvature radius of R2, and may further include a third curved surface having a curvature radius of R3 in a longitudinal direction or a width direction. In other embodiments, the cover window 310 e may further include curved surfaces having curvature radii of R4, R5, . . . , and RN (N is a natural number) in addition to the curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cover window 310 e is formed to have the first, second, and third curved surfaces having the curvature radii of R1, R2, and R3 in a width direction.
  • In particular, the cover window 310 e may be formed to protrude toward the first adhesive layer 320 e. The TSP 340 e, the second adhesive layer 350 e, and the display panel 330 e may be sequentially stacked and fixed to a protruding outer surface of the cover window 310 e on the first adhesive layer 320 e. Accordingly, since the display device 300 e is formed to have a set or predetermined curvature radii, the display device 300 e may be applied to various members.
  • FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 400 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 35 , the apparatus 400 e may include a first jig 410 e, a second jig 420 e, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 430 e), and a cushion unit 490 e. An outer surface of the first jig 410 e on which the cover window 310 e is seated may be formed equally or similarly to an outer surface of the cover window 310 e contacting the outer surface of the first jig 410 e. In further detail, the first jig 410 e may have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii of R1, R2′, R3′, . . . , like the cover window 310 e. In particular, the first jig 410 e may be formed to protrude toward the second jig 420 e.
  • An outer surface of the second jig 420 e may be recessed away from the first jig 410 e to correspond to or engage with a protruding portion of the first jig 410 e. The outer surface of the second jig 420 e may include at least two curved surfaces having set or predetermined curvature radii.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 415 e and a second driving unit 425 e. The first driving unit 415 e may linearly move the first jig 410 e toward the second jig 420 e, and the second driving unit 425 e may linearly move the second jig 420 e toward the first jig 410 e. The first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may be formed in the same manner as or a similar manner to those described above.
  • In addition, the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 430 e provided on the first jig 410 e and a second fixing unit provided on the second jig 420 e. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the fixing unit includes the first fixing unit 430 e. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 e and the second fixing unit may be formed in the same manner or a similar manner, and thus a detailed description of the second fixing unit will not be given.
  • The first fixing unit 430 e may be formed in various ways. For example, the first fixing unit 430 e may include an adhesive member, an adhesive chuck, or an electrostatic chuck. In addition, the first fixing unit 430 e may include a first absorption unit, and a first absorption pump that is connected to the first absorption unit. In particular, the first fixing unit 430 e is not limited thereto, and may include a clamp, or a protrusion that is provided on the first jig 410 e and mechanically restricts the cover window 310 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first fixing unit 430 e includes an adhesive member.
  • The cushion unit 490 e may be provided on at least one of the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e. In this case, the cushion unit is the same as or similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the cushion unit is provided on each of the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 e by using the apparatus 400 e will now be described. First, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared. In this case, a method of manufacturing the cover window 310 e is similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e.
  • After the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are manufactured and prepared as described above, the cover window 310 e may be disposed on the first jig 410 e. The cover window 310 e may be formed to have at least two curved surfaces having curvature radii as described above and may be seated on an outer surface of the first jig 410 e. The cover window 310 e may be adhered and fixed by the first fixing unit 430 e.
  • While the process is performed, the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e may be disposed on the second jig 420 e. The display panel 330 e may be disposed to face the second jig 420 e, and the TSP 340 e may be disposed to face the first jig 410 e.
  • After the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e are disposed as described above, the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e. The first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed of the same material as or a similar material to that of the second adhesive layer 350 e.
  • When the cover window 310 e, the TSP 340 e, and the display panel 330 e are completely disposed as described above, the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e may be moved toward each other by driving the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e. A protruding portion of the cover window 310 e may first contact the first adhesive layer 320 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be sequentially laminated from central portions of the display panel 330 e to both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • While the process is performed, a first cushion unit 493 e and a second cushion unit 491 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
  • When the process is completed, the first driving unit 415 e and the second driving unit 425 e may operate to separate the first jig 410 e and the second jig 420 e. The operator may complete an operation by removing the completed display device 300 e from the first jig 410 e or the second jig 420 e.
  • The operation may be performed in a vacuum state. In further detail, the apparatus 400 e may include a chamber (see, for example, chamber C in FIG. 4C) in which the first jig 410 e, the second jig 420 e, the fixing unit, and the driving unit M are disposed. In addition, the apparatus 400 e may include a pressure adjustment unit that adjusts a pressure in the chamber. The pressure adjustment unit may maintain a pressure in the chamber in a vacuum state when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated. In addition, the pressure adjustment unit may restore and maintain a pressure in the chamber in an atmospheric pressure state after the process is completed.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 400 e may manufacture any type of display device 300 e. In addition, the apparatus 400 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by effectively removing vapors or preventing vapors from being generated between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are laminated.
  • FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 500 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 36 , the apparatus 500 e includes a first jig 510 e, a second jig 520 e, a driving unit M, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 530 e), and a cushion unit 590 e. In this case, the first jig 510 e, the second jig 520 e, the driving unit M, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 590 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 515 e and a second driving unit 525 e, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 530 e. In this case, the first driving unit 515 e, the second driving unit 525 e, and the first fixing unit 530 e are substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The apparatus 500 e includes a clamping unit 550 e that is spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e, and supports the panel member 390 e. For convenience of description, however, it will be assumed that the clamping unit 550 e is disposed adjacent to the second jig 520 e.
  • The clamping unit 550 e may support the panel member 390 e when one end of the panel member 390 e is inserted into the clamping unit 550 e. A plurality of the clamping units 550 e may be provided, where a distance S7 between the clamping units 550 e is less than a length or a width of the panel member 390 e. The panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e as described above. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S7 between the plurality of clamping units 550 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • In particular, the plurality of clamping units 550 e face respective side surfaces of the second jig 520 e, and fix both ends of the display panel 330 e, the second adhesive layer 350 e, the TSP 340 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e. The plurality of clamping units 550 include a first clamping unit 551 e and a second clamping unit 552 e that are spaced apart by a set or predetermined interval from each other.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and easily manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface and a simple structure. In addition, since the apparatus 500 e may accurately attach the cover window 310 e having a curved surface to the panel member 390 e, a product defect rate may be reduced or minimized.
  • In particular, since the apparatus 500 e includes the clamping unit 550 e to accurately align the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e, working efficiency may be improved.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 e by using the apparatus 500 e will now be described.
  • The cover window 310 e may be formed as described above, the display panel 330 e may be formed, and then the TSP 340 e and the display panel 330 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e. The cover window 310 e may be mounted on the first jig 510 e as described above.
  • When the process is completed, the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e, which may then be fixed to the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e. A method of fixing the TSP 340 e may include inserting and fixing both ends of the TSP 340 e into insertion grooves formed in the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e as described above.
  • Once the display panel 330 e, the second adhesive layer 350 e, the TSP 340 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e are fixed in this manner, portions of the display panel 330 e, the second adhesive layer 350 e, the TSP 340 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e may protrude toward the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e. In further detail, since the distance S7 between the first clamping unit 551 e and the second clamping unit 552 e is less than a width or a length of at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e, the portions may protrude toward the second jig 520 e or protrude toward the first jig 510 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that one portion of the panel member 390 e protrudes toward the second jig 520 e.
  • When the display panel 330 e, the second adhesive layer 350 e, the TSP 340 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e are fixed, the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 510 e or the second jig 520 e. For convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first adhesive layer 320 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed by moving both the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e.
  • When the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e move, the first driving unit 515 e and the second driving unit 525 e may operate to move the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e closer to each other.
  • A protruding portion of the cover window 310 e first contacts the first adhesive layer 320 e. When the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e continuously move, the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be laminated beginning from a contact portion between the cover window 310 e and the first adhesive layer 320 e toward both end portions.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 510 e and the second jig 520 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • A first cushion unit 593 e and a second cushion unit 591 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed and laminated.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 500 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 500 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 500 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
  • FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 600 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 37 , the apparatus 600 e includes a first jig 610 e, a second jig 620 e, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 650 e, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 630 e), a cushion unit 690 e, and a linear moving unit L. The first jig 610 e, the second jig 620 e, the driving unit, the clamping unit 650 e, the fixing unit, and the cushion unit 690 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 615 e and a second driving unit 625 e, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 630 e. The first driving unit 615 e, the second driving unit 625 e, and the first fixing unit 630 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The clamping unit 650 e may include a first clamping unit 651 e and a second clamping unit 652 e. The first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear moving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 660 e and a second linear driving unit 670 e that respectively vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e. In this case, the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e are formed similarly, and thus the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 660 e.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first shaft 661 e that is connected to the first clamping unit 651 e and linearly moves the first clamping unit 651 e. In addition, the first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first driving module 665 e that drives the first shaft 661 e. The first driving module 665 e may be formed to include a cylinder or a motor. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first driving module 665 e includes a motor. In addition, it will be assumed that the first shaft 661 e includes a ball screw that is raised and lowered as the first driving module 665 e rotates.
  • The first linear driving unit 660 e may include a first elastic unit 663 e that surrounds the first shaft 661 e. The first elastic unit 663 e may include a compression spring, or may be formed of an elastic material such as rubber. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the first elastic unit 663 e includes a compression spring.
  • The first elastic unit 663 e may be disposed to surround an outer surface of the first shaft 661 e as described above, and thus may provide a restoring force to the first clamping unit 651 e when the first clamping unit 651 e moves.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 e by using the apparatus 600 e will now be described. First, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 e may include at least one of the display panel 330 e or the TSP 340 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 e includes the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • The display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e prepared as described above may be attached by using the second adhesive layer 350 e, and then the first adhesive layer 320 e may be formed on the TSP 340 e. In this case, both ends of the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e on which the first adhesive layer 320 e is formed may be fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
  • When the panel member 390 e is fixed to the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e as described above, a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or may protrude toward the first jig 610 e. In further detail, since a distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width or a length of the panel member 390 e, a portion of the panel member 390 e may protrude toward the second jig 620 e or protrude toward the first jig 610 e. In this case, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the distance S8 between the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e is less than a width of the panel member 390 e and a portion of the panel member 390 e protrudes toward the second jig 620 e.
  • When the panel member 390 e is disposed as described above, the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 610 e or the second jig 620 e. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed against each other by moving both the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e.
  • When the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e move as described above, the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to vertically move the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e. In particular, the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may move at a speed similar to a speed at which the second jig 620 e moves.
  • When the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e are raised as described above, the panel member 390 e may be raised while maintaining its curved state. When a distance between the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e reaches a set or predetermined distance, the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e may release the panel member 390 e.
  • In particular, after the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e operate as described above, the first linear driving unit 660 e and the second linear driving unit 670 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 651 e and the second clamping unit 652 e.
  • After that, the first driving unit 615 e and the second driving unit 625 e may continuously operate to make the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e get closer to each other. In particular, as the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e get closer to each other, the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed. In this case, a method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e is performed in the same manner as that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 610 e and the second jig 620 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • A first cushion unit 693 e and a second cushion unit 691 e may uniformly distribute a force applied to the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed and laminated.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 600 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 600 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 600 e may improve product quality by removing air bubbles that may be generated (or preventing air bubbles from being generated) when the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed.
  • FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an apparatus 700 e for manufacturing the display device 300 e of FIG. 34 , according to still yet another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Referring to FIG. 38 , the apparatus 700 e may include a first jig 710 e, a second jig 720 e, a driving unit M, a clamping unit 750 e, a fixing unit (for example, first fixing unit 730 e), a linear driving unit L, and a cushion unit 790 e (including a first cushion unit 793 e and a second cushion unit 791 e). The first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The driving unit M may include a first driving unit 715 e and a second driving unit 725 e, and the fixing unit may include a first fixing unit 730 e. The first driving unit 715 e, the second driving unit 725 e, and the first fixing unit 730 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • In addition, the clamping unit 750 e may include a first clamping unit 751 e and a second clamping unit 752 e. The first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be substantially the same as those described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • The linear driving unit L may include a first linear driving unit 760 e and a second linear driving unit 770 e, and the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e, respectively. In particular, the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may linearly move the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e in a diagonal direction. Since the second linear driving unit 770 e may be formed similarly to the first linear driving unit 760 e, the following description will focus on the first linear driving unit 760 e.
  • In further detail, the first linear driving unit 760 e may include a first shaft 761 e, a first driving module 765 e, and a first elastic unit 763 e. The first shaft 761 e, the first driving module 765 e, and the first elastic unit 763 e may be formed in a similar manner to those described above except that the first shaft 761 e is disposed in a diagonal direction to diagonally move the first clamping unit 751 e.
  • In particular, when the first linear driving unit 760 e operates, the first driving module 765 e may vary a length of the first shaft 761 e. Since the first driving module 765 e and the first shaft 761 e are diagonally disposed with respect to the second jig 720 e as described above, the first clamping unit 751 e may be diagonally moved by varying the movement of the first shaft 761 e.
  • For example, when the first driving module 765 e operates to diagonally move the first shaft 761 e downward with respect to the second jig 720 e, the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move downward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
  • When the first driving module 765 e operates in an opposite direction to diagonally move the first shaft 761 e upward with respect to the second jig 720 e, the first clamping unit 751 e may diagonally move upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first shaft 761 e moves.
  • The first shaft 761 e may include a ball screw as described above and thus may rotate as the first driving module 765 e operates. In particular, the first shaft 761 e may diagonally move downward or upward with respect to the second jig 720 e as the first driving module 765 e rotates.
  • A method of manufacturing the display device 300 e may be similar to that described above. In further detail, the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be manufactured and prepared. The panel member 390 e may include the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e as described above. However, for convenience of description, it will be assumed that the panel member 390 e includes both the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e.
  • When the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e are completely manufactured as described above, the display panel 330 e and the TSP 340 e may be adhered by using the second adhesive layer 350 e, and the first adhesive layer 320 e may be coated on the TSP 340 e.
  • The panel member 390 e manufactured as described above may be fixed by the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e. When the fixing is completed, the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be compressed against each other by moving at least one of the first jig 710 e or the second jig 720 e. A method of compressing the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e may be similar to that described above, and thus a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.
  • When the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e move in this manner, the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may also move. In particular, the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be diagonally moved by the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e, respectively. The first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be raised diagonally.
  • When the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are raised and then an interval between the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e reaches a preset interval, both ends of the panel member 390 e may be released.
  • After the releasing of the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e as described above, the first linear driving unit 760 e and the second linear driving unit 770 e may operate to lower the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e. The first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e may be lowered diagonally.
  • While the first clamping unit 751 e and the second clamping unit 752 e are lowered, the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e may get closer to each other to compress the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e. In this case, a method of adhering the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e through compression may be similar to that described above.
  • When the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e are compressed by moving the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e as described above, the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may distribute a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e. In addition, the first cushion unit 793 e and the second cushion unit 791 e may help prevent the panel member 390 e or the cover window 310 e from being damaged by absorbing part of a force applied to the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e.
  • In particular, when the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e contact each other, a load range applied when the first jig 710 e and the second jig 720 e compress the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be greater than or equal to 0.3 MPa and less than or equal to 0.5 MPa. When the load range is less than 0.3 MPa, an adhesive force between the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be reduced, and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be delaminated and separated from each other. In addition, when the load range exceeds 0.5 MPa and the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e are attached to each other, the cover window 310 e and the panel member 390 e may be damaged, thereby reducing quality and reliability.
  • Accordingly, the apparatus 700 e may rapidly and accurately manufacture the display device 300 e having a curved surface. In particular, the apparatus 700 e may reduce or minimize a product defect rate by accurately attaching the panel member 390 e and the cover window 310 e having a curved surface.
  • In addition, the apparatus 700 e may improve quality by removing air bubbles or preventing air bubbles from being generated when the display panel 330 e and the panel member 390 e are compressed. This application relates in general to a display device and more particularly, to a display device and a corresponding method and apparatus for manufacturing the display device that may rapidly, accurately, and cleanly manufacture the display device having a curved shape. Small electronic devices having curved display devices have presented challenges in accurately forming and aligning their corresponding cover windows (for example, transparent protective covers) and display panels (such as OLED display panels or flexible OLED display panels), and adhering the cover windows to the display panels via transparent adhesive without quality defects such as air bubbles between the cover windows and the display panels.
  • Embodiments of the present invention address these problems by providing a display device having a curved cover window, a display panel and/or touch screen panel (TSP) that fits in the cover window, and an adhesive layer between the display device and the cover window, together with an apparatus and method for manufacturing the display device. The cover window is fabricated with a curved shape (such as rounded edges, inward or outward) and mounted on a first jig having a mount surface that conforms to the cover window. For example, the cover window may sit in the first jig (through gravity) or attach to the first jig via a fixing unit, such as a vacuum suction device. Meanwhile, the display panel (to which the adhesive layer is attached), is attached to a second jig by similar means. The distance between the jigs is then closed (by moving one or both jigs towards the other using, for example, driving units), allowing the display panel to press up to the cover window and adhere via the adhesive layer, and without forming air bubbles between the cover window and the display panel.
  • In another embodiment, the display panel may be attached to a clamp unit, such as a pair of clamps, and bent through a clamping force to mate cleanly with the cover window when the jigs are moved towards each other. The clamps may be moved via dedicated driving units (for example, which drive ball screws through rotational movement to move the clamps) independently of the jigs, and may move, for example vertically or diagonally with respect to the jigs (and with respect to a gravity direction).
  • While the present invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to exemplary embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that various changes in form and details may be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the following claims, and equivalents thereof.

Claims (21)

What is claimed is:
1. A display device comprising:
a cover window comprising a curved portion; and
a panel member on the cover window,
wherein an end of the panel member is on a surface of the curved portion of the cover window, and covers a portion and exposes another portion of the surface of the curved portion of the cover window.
2. The display device of claim 1, wherein the panel member is smaller in at least one of a length or a width than the cover window.
3. The display device of claim 1, further comprising an adhesive layer between the panel member and the cover window.
4. The display device of claim 1, wherein the cover window further comprises a flat portion extending from the curved portion.
5. The display device of claim 4, wherein the panel member is entirely on the flat portion.
6. The display device of claim 4, wherein the curved portion comprises a plurality of curved portions.
7. The display device of claim 4, wherein the panel member comprises:
a first panel portion on the flat portion; and
a second panel portion extending in a curved shape from the first panel portion and being on the curved portion.
8. The display device of claim 1, wherein the cover window has a curved surface having a curvature radius.
9. The display device of claim 8, wherein a curvature radius of a portion of the cover window is different from a curvature radius of another portion of the cover window.
10. The display device of claim 1, wherein the panel member is on a recessed outer surface of the cover window or a protruding outer surface of the cover window.
11. The display device of claim 1, wherein the panel member comprises at least one of a display panel or a touch screen panel (TSP).
12. The display device of claim 1, wherein the panel member is flexible.
13. A display device comprising:
a cover window comprising a central portion that is flat, one end that is connected to the central portion and has a first curved surface, and an other end that is connected to the central portion and has a second curved surface; and
a panel member that is on one surface of the cover window to be bent,
wherein an end of the panel member is on one of the first and second curved surfaces of the cover window, and covers a portion and exposes another portion of the one of the first and second curved surfaces of the cover window.
14. The display device of claim 13, wherein the panel member is attached to an outer surface of the cover window that is recessed or to an outer surface of the cover window that protrudes.
15. The display device of claim 13, wherein a size of the panel member is different from a size of the cover window.
16. The display device of claim 15, wherein the size of the panel member is less than the size of the cover window.
17. The display device of claim 15, wherein both ends of the panel member are on at least one selected from the first curved surface and the second curved surface of the cover window.
18. The display device of claim 13, wherein the panel member comprises:
a first adhesive layer that is on the cover window;
a touch panel that is on the first adhesive layer;
a second adhesive layer that is on the touch panel; and
a display panel that is on the second adhesive layer.
19. The display device of claim 13, wherein the panel member is flexible.
20. The display device of claim 13, wherein at least one selected from the first curved surface and the second curved surface is a curved surface having at least one radius of curvature.
21. The display device of claim 13, wherein the first curved surface is a curved surface having a first radius of curvature and the second curved surface is a curved surface having a second radius of curvature that is different from the first radius of curvature.
US18/297,582 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same Pending US20230247776A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/297,582 US20230247776A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Applications Claiming Priority (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20120071375 2012-06-29
KR10-2012-0071375 2012-06-29
KR10-2013-0014650 2013-02-08
KR1020130014650A KR20140002470A (en) 2012-06-29 2013-02-08 Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same
KR10-2013-0062110 2013-05-30
KR1020130062110A KR102147842B1 (en) 2012-06-29 2013-05-30 Manufacturing device of a display device
US13/931,795 US11523522B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2013-06-28 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US14/794,720 US11627670B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-08 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US18/297,582 US20230247776A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/794,720 Continuation US11627670B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-08 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230247776A1 true US20230247776A1 (en) 2023-08-03

Family

ID=48771287

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/931,795 Active 2033-07-01 US11523522B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2013-06-28 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US14/794,720 Active 2036-03-18 US11627670B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-08 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US14/803,025 Active 2034-07-18 US10194538B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-17 Method and apparatus for manufacturing a display device
US18/062,014 Pending US20230095460A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2022-12-05 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US18/297,582 Pending US20230247776A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US18/297,586 Pending US20230247777A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Family Applications Before (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/931,795 Active 2033-07-01 US11523522B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2013-06-28 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US14/794,720 Active 2036-03-18 US11627670B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-08 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US14/803,025 Active 2034-07-18 US10194538B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2015-07-17 Method and apparatus for manufacturing a display device
US18/062,014 Pending US20230095460A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2022-12-05 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/297,586 Pending US20230247777A1 (en) 2012-06-29 2023-04-07 Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (6) US11523522B2 (en)
EP (3) EP3050704B1 (en)
KR (3) KR20140002470A (en)
CN (6) CN106626719B (en)
TW (4) TWI596761B (en)

Families Citing this family (134)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20140002470A (en) 2012-06-29 2014-01-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same
US9439315B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2016-09-06 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
KR102012044B1 (en) * 2012-09-03 2019-08-20 리쿠아비스타 비.브이. Apparatus of joining substrates for electrowetting display panel and method of joining substrates for electrowetting display using the same
KR101701247B1 (en) 2013-05-27 2017-02-02 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Laminating device and Laminating method using the same
KR101861629B1 (en) * 2013-05-27 2018-05-29 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Device for bonding window and method for manufacturing display device using the same
KR102131962B1 (en) * 2013-06-25 2020-07-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Manufacturing device for a cover window and manufacturing method for the cover window
US9496522B2 (en) * 2013-12-13 2016-11-15 Universal Display Corporation OLED optically coupled to curved substrate
JP6607666B2 (en) * 2013-10-10 2019-11-20 三星ディスプレイ株式會社 Window member of curved surface display device, method of manufacturing window member of curved surface display device, and curved surface display device including the same
KR102118578B1 (en) * 2013-10-17 2020-06-04 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Organic light emitting diode display
CN103793100A (en) * 2014-01-25 2014-05-14 江西合力泰科技股份有限公司 Intramode injection molding 2.5D/ 3D touch display integration device
US9363342B2 (en) * 2014-03-05 2016-06-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and arrangement to generate a bending force on a display
KR102187473B1 (en) 2014-03-17 2020-12-08 엘지이노텍 주식회사 Touch device
KR102175509B1 (en) * 2014-03-28 2020-11-09 주식회사 나래나노텍 Apparatus and Method of Bonding Flexible Display and Curved Cover Element
KR101471819B1 (en) * 2014-04-18 2014-12-12 주식회사 트레이스 A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using a rotational suction plate
KR101486861B1 (en) * 2014-04-18 2015-01-30 주식회사 트레이스 A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using rollers
KR101470935B1 (en) * 2014-04-22 2014-12-10 주식회사 트레이스 A device for laminating on a curved cover glass using a suction belt
US10011090B1 (en) * 2014-06-27 2018-07-03 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Planar pressing for manufacture of displays
KR102155252B1 (en) * 2014-07-01 2020-09-11 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing the same
KR101677014B1 (en) * 2014-08-14 2016-11-17 안성룡 The method for manufacturing a flexible display device
KR101668081B1 (en) * 2014-08-14 2016-10-19 안성룡 The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to the curved window glass
KR101746650B1 (en) 2014-09-02 2017-06-14 주식회사 토비스 a apparatus of curved display manufacturing, and a method of curved display manufacturing
KR102241849B1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2021-04-20 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing display apparatus and method of manufacturing display apparatus
KR101676474B1 (en) * 2014-10-14 2016-11-14 안성룡 The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to a curved sustrate
KR101697488B1 (en) * 2014-10-14 2017-02-01 안성룡 The apparatus for attaching a flexible sheet to a curved sustrate
KR101644903B1 (en) 2014-10-30 2016-08-03 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid crystal display and method of manufacturing the same
KR102250710B1 (en) * 2014-10-31 2021-05-10 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing the same
MY178518A (en) * 2014-11-14 2020-10-15 Bosch Gmbh Robert Method and apparatus for optical bonding, and a display
KR102333633B1 (en) * 2014-11-14 2021-12-01 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for display device and method for display device using the same
KR20160070876A (en) 2014-12-10 2016-06-21 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Manufacturing device of a display device and manufacturing method of the display device using the same
KR102261876B1 (en) * 2015-01-06 2021-06-07 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and driving method thereof
CN104570448A (en) * 2015-01-27 2015-04-29 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display panel and display device
KR102348799B1 (en) * 2015-01-14 2022-01-07 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing flexible display device
KR20160090452A (en) 2015-01-21 2016-08-01 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Curved display device
KR102345440B1 (en) * 2015-02-13 2021-12-30 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 display panel manufacturing apparatus
KR102274142B1 (en) 2015-03-10 2021-07-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and portable terminal
KR102374644B1 (en) * 2015-03-24 2022-03-15 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
KR102403224B1 (en) * 2015-04-03 2022-05-30 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Window and display device comprising the same
KR101578442B1 (en) * 2015-04-22 2015-12-21 (주)제이스텍 Attaching apparatus of edge window and pannel using diaphragm
KR101788198B1 (en) * 2015-04-28 2017-10-20 삼성전자주식회사 Lamination apparatus and lamination method using the same
KR102348266B1 (en) * 2015-05-21 2022-01-10 삼성전자주식회사 Electronic device, fabrication method and device for exterior member of the same
KR102367467B1 (en) * 2015-06-16 2022-02-25 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Manufacturing device for display device
KR101588600B1 (en) * 2015-07-23 2016-02-01 주식회사 톱텍 bonding device for window, bonding method using it
KR102569315B1 (en) * 2015-07-27 2023-08-23 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
KR102368462B1 (en) * 2015-08-07 2022-03-02 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Fabrication method of glass, fabrication method of display device
KR102343289B1 (en) * 2015-08-19 2021-12-28 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Lamination device
CN105118391B (en) * 2015-10-12 2017-10-17 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Assembly method and device for display panel and cover plate
KR102494018B1 (en) * 2015-10-13 2023-02-01 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Laminating device and laminating method using the same
CN105242430B (en) * 2015-10-19 2018-11-23 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Curved surface is to the full laminating apparatus of plane and method
KR102556026B1 (en) 2015-10-26 2023-07-17 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 A apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus
KR102396460B1 (en) 2015-10-29 2022-05-11 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Curved display device and electronic device comprising the same
KR102167504B1 (en) * 2015-11-05 2020-10-20 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Manufacturing device for display device
KR102512728B1 (en) 2016-02-05 2023-03-24 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus
JP6556269B2 (en) * 2016-02-08 2019-08-07 堺ディスプレイプロダクト株式会社 Inspection equipment
KR102551139B1 (en) 2016-03-10 2023-07-04 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing display device and manufacturing method thereof
KR102537377B1 (en) * 2016-03-10 2023-05-26 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing display device and manufacturing method thereof
KR101712595B1 (en) * 2016-04-21 2017-03-06 공정민 Laminating apparatus and laminating method
US10919211B2 (en) * 2016-07-22 2021-02-16 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Method of manufacturing display device
KR102183540B1 (en) * 2016-08-30 2020-11-27 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Laminate apparatus and method for manufacturing display device
CN106328575B (en) * 2016-08-31 2019-07-12 昆山工研院新型平板显示技术中心有限公司 A kind of stripping means and device of flexible display panels
KR102535154B1 (en) * 2016-09-05 2023-05-22 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Bending apparatus and method for manufacturing display device
KR102638297B1 (en) * 2016-09-23 2024-02-20 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Manufacturing method and apparatus for a display device
KR102695748B1 (en) * 2016-09-26 2024-08-16 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Laminating apparatus and laminating method using the same
KR101881296B1 (en) * 2016-11-08 2018-07-25 희성전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for laminating a window
KR102152734B1 (en) * 2016-11-17 2020-09-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Laminate apparatus and method for manufacturing display device
CN107037923B (en) * 2017-03-02 2020-08-07 业成科技(成都)有限公司 Bonding structure of touch panel with dual-axis curved surface
CN206523497U (en) * 2017-03-14 2017-09-26 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Tool
CN107039604B (en) * 2017-04-18 2018-09-04 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 Flexible display panels adhering device and its attaching method
CN107195792B (en) * 2017-05-08 2018-11-27 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 The manufacturing device and method of curved face display panel
KR101911049B1 (en) * 2017-06-26 2018-10-24 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for manufacturing display device
JP6941986B2 (en) * 2017-06-28 2021-09-29 芝浦メカトロニクス株式会社 Holding device, positioning device and bonding device
KR102499852B1 (en) * 2017-09-07 2023-02-14 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
US11065960B2 (en) * 2017-09-13 2021-07-20 Corning Incorporated Curved vehicle displays
GB2567679B (en) * 2017-10-20 2022-12-14 Flexenable Ltd Curved devices
KR102309847B1 (en) 2017-10-31 2021-10-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Curved Display Device and Electronic Device
CN107731102A (en) * 2017-10-31 2018-02-23 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 The method for assembling and camber display screen of a kind of camber display screen
CN109754713A (en) * 2017-11-03 2019-05-14 阳程科技股份有限公司 Application of a surface device and its applying method
KR102246643B1 (en) * 2017-11-17 2021-04-30 주식회사 제우스 Manufacturing method of cover glass part and manufacturing apparatus of cover glass part
CN107863005A (en) * 2017-11-27 2018-03-30 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 Bend tool
US10998296B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2021-05-04 Zkw Group Gmbh In-vehicle display device using semiconductor light-emitting device
CN111527422B (en) * 2017-12-07 2022-03-29 Zkw集团有限责任公司 In-vehicle display apparatus using semiconductor light emitting device
US10937769B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2021-03-02 Zkw Group Gmbh In-vehicle display device using semiconductor light-emitting device
KR102471022B1 (en) * 2018-01-25 2022-11-25 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Pad and bonding method for bonding a film using the same
KR102587583B1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2023-10-11 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Jig assembly and method for manufacturing display device using the same
CN108773142B (en) * 2018-06-08 2021-01-15 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Foldable display panel, and laminating method and laminating device thereof
KR20200010928A (en) 2018-07-23 2020-01-31 에이피에스홀딩스 주식회사 Apparatus for laminating pannel to window and method for laminating pannel to window
CN108973303A (en) * 2018-07-26 2018-12-11 信利光电股份有限公司 A kind of application of a surface fixture and applying method
CN108847139A (en) * 2018-08-24 2018-11-20 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 A kind of adhering device and attaching method being bent display panel
KR102266890B1 (en) * 2018-08-29 2021-06-21 에이피시스템 주식회사 Electrostatic chuck, equipment for attaching having the same and method for attaching
CN109148728B (en) * 2018-08-31 2019-10-29 昆山国显光电有限公司 A kind of display panel and display device
KR20200042579A (en) * 2018-10-15 2020-04-24 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device
KR102582395B1 (en) 2018-11-12 2023-09-26 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Zig for cover window
KR102676697B1 (en) * 2018-12-06 2024-06-19 삼성전자주식회사 Lamination device
KR20200078243A (en) 2018-12-21 2020-07-01 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Flexible display device and apparatus for manufacturing the same, and structure
CN109968786B (en) * 2019-03-28 2021-03-23 潍坊路加精工有限公司 Automatic paying type film sticking device
KR20200120784A (en) 2019-04-11 2020-10-22 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and manufacturing method for the display device
CN110010013B (en) * 2019-04-18 2021-01-26 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Flexible display module and preparation method thereof
CN110197618B (en) * 2019-06-28 2020-08-25 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 Laminating method of curved-surface display panel
KR102250824B1 (en) * 2019-07-23 2021-05-11 (주)에스티아이 Laminating apparatus laminating method using the same
CN112289175B (en) * 2019-07-24 2022-09-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Display panel manufacturing method, display panel and terminal
KR102236234B1 (en) * 2019-07-26 2021-04-05 (주)에스티아이 Window holding module and laminating apparatus including the same
CN110289374B (en) * 2019-07-31 2021-05-14 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Laminating tool and laminating method for flexible display panel
CN110633022B (en) * 2019-09-18 2022-07-01 业成科技(成都)有限公司 Touch module and manufacturing method and application thereof
CN110728909A (en) * 2019-09-29 2020-01-24 联想(北京)有限公司 Electronic equipment and method for attaching screen
KR102357457B1 (en) * 2019-10-15 2022-02-04 (주)에스티아이 Substrate and substrate transper apparatus for transperring the same and substrate transper method using the same
CN110827682B (en) * 2019-10-21 2021-03-23 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 Bonding apparatus and bonding method
JP7417246B2 (en) * 2019-10-31 2024-01-18 株式会社タカトリ Pasting device and method
KR102295056B1 (en) 2019-11-04 2021-08-27 (주)에스티아이 Display lamination system and display lamination method using the same
KR20210063907A (en) 2019-11-25 2021-06-02 에이피시스템 주식회사 Laminating apparatus and laminating method using the same
KR102252805B1 (en) * 2019-11-28 2021-05-14 (주)에스티아이 Display lamination system and display lamination method using the same
KR102382179B1 (en) * 2019-11-28 2022-04-04 (주)에스티아이 Laminating apparatus
CN110930887A (en) * 2019-12-25 2020-03-27 联想(北京)有限公司 Preparation method and system and folding display screen
KR20210084879A (en) * 2019-12-30 2021-07-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus
CN111105715B (en) 2020-01-03 2022-04-12 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 Foldable display device and preparation method and jig thereof
CN212097892U (en) * 2020-01-20 2020-12-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Flexible display panel laminating device
CN114026529B (en) * 2020-03-20 2024-04-09 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Preparation method of mold and display device
CN111399687A (en) * 2020-03-30 2020-07-10 深圳市华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 Cover plate attaching system, cover plate attaching method and touch display panel
KR102346436B1 (en) 2020-03-31 2022-01-05 에이피시스템 주식회사 Apparatus for laminating pannel to window and method for laminating pannel to window
KR20210130328A (en) * 2020-04-21 2021-11-01 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Bonding device and manufacturing method of display device using same
CN111540269B (en) * 2020-04-27 2022-04-19 深圳市联得自动化装备股份有限公司 Laminating jig, laminating equipment and laminating method
CN111415592B (en) * 2020-04-29 2022-04-15 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Method for attaching flexible display panel and cover glass and display device
KR102698113B1 (en) * 2020-06-03 2024-08-26 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Support, bonding device including support, and method of manufacturing display device using the same
CN111681539B (en) * 2020-06-24 2022-03-29 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Display module, manufacturing method thereof and electronic equipment
CN112172223A (en) * 2020-09-23 2021-01-05 广州国显科技有限公司 Laminating jig and curved surface laminating method
KR20220041582A (en) 2020-09-25 2022-04-01 에이피시스템 주식회사 Apparatus for laminating and method for laminating
KR20220043624A (en) 2020-09-29 2022-04-05 에이피시스템 주식회사 Supporting apparatus and laminating apparatus
CN112164314B (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-09-23 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Preparation method of display device and display device
KR20220050299A (en) * 2020-10-15 2022-04-25 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Guide film and method for manufacturing a display device
CN112770557B (en) * 2020-11-25 2022-05-20 中驰三龙电力股份有限公司 Dustproof heat dissipation type power box
CN112903253B (en) * 2021-01-21 2024-01-30 昆山国显光电有限公司 Testing jig and testing method for flexible display panel
CN112863357B (en) * 2021-01-25 2023-01-31 合肥维信诺科技有限公司 Laminating device
KR20220114848A (en) 2021-02-09 2022-08-17 에이피시스템 주식회사 Apparatus for peeling adhesive film, system for laminating pannel to window having the same and method for peeling adhesive film
KR20220141534A (en) 2021-04-13 2022-10-20 에이피시스템 주식회사 Apparatus for laminating panel to window
CN114005370B (en) * 2021-11-19 2024-02-20 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 Bonding device and bonding method
CN115157140B (en) * 2022-07-05 2023-12-05 业成科技(成都)有限公司 Attaching jig

Family Cites Families (82)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US472008A (en) * 1892-03-29 Wesley young
US5131968A (en) * 1990-07-31 1992-07-21 Motorola, Inc. Gradient chuck method for wafer bonding employing a convex pressure
JPH07114347A (en) 1993-10-14 1995-05-02 Alps Electric Co Ltd Display device and its production
TW432246B (en) * 1996-06-11 2001-05-01 Seiko Epson Corp Method and apparatus for manufacturing liquid crystal display
JP4304852B2 (en) * 2000-09-04 2009-07-29 コニカミノルタホールディングス株式会社 Non-flat liquid crystal display element and method for manufacturing the same
KR100474750B1 (en) 2000-10-13 2005-03-10 가부시키가이샤 덴소 Touch panel, display device, and method of manufacturing touch panel
TW558743B (en) 2001-08-22 2003-10-21 Semiconductor Energy Lab Peeling method and method of manufacturing semiconductor device
US6953735B2 (en) 2001-12-28 2005-10-11 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for fabricating a semiconductor device by transferring a layer to a support with curvature
JP4567941B2 (en) 2001-12-28 2010-10-27 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Method for manufacturing semiconductor device and method for manufacturing display device
KR100860522B1 (en) 2002-03-23 2008-09-26 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Conveying apparatus of liquid crystal display panel
US7190335B2 (en) * 2002-03-26 2007-03-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Light emitting device and method of manufacturing the same
JP3884351B2 (en) 2002-08-26 2007-02-21 株式会社 日立ディスプレイズ Image display device and manufacturing method thereof
US20040135160A1 (en) 2003-01-10 2004-07-15 Eastman Kodak Company OLED device
JP2005161528A (en) 2003-11-28 2005-06-23 Ricoh Co Ltd Plastic laminate and its manufacturing method
US7278760B2 (en) * 2004-05-24 2007-10-09 Osram Opto Semiconductor Gmbh Light-emitting electronic component
KR100596340B1 (en) * 2004-06-01 2006-07-06 주식회사 에이디피엔지니어링 Flat back light and Method for manufacturing flat back light
TWI261287B (en) 2004-06-01 2006-09-01 Advanced Display Proc Eng Co Flat fluorescent lamp and method of manufacturing the same
JP3815687B1 (en) 2005-03-09 2006-08-30 株式会社 シーズ Clamp unit for substrate transfer
US7368307B2 (en) * 2005-06-07 2008-05-06 Eastman Kodak Company Method of manufacturing an OLED device with a curved light emitting surface
KR20060129848A (en) 2005-06-13 2006-12-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Wireless mobile terminal and its cover member and method for manufacturing the cover member
JP5217170B2 (en) * 2006-02-14 2013-06-19 Dic株式会社 Light-shielding adhesive tape and LCD module using the same
KR100784012B1 (en) 2006-02-20 2007-12-07 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Organic Light Emitting Display and Fabrication Method for the same
JP4837471B2 (en) 2006-02-20 2011-12-14 三星モバイルディスプレイ株式會社 Organic electroluminescent display device and manufacturing method thereof
JP2007326259A (en) * 2006-06-07 2007-12-20 Yoshida Industry Co Ltd Method for producing display and display
KR101232157B1 (en) 2006-06-09 2013-02-12 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Apparatus for Testing LCD Panel
FR2902105B1 (en) 2006-06-13 2008-09-12 Essilor Int METHOD FOR BONDING A FILM TO A CURVED SUBSTRATE
TWI421607B (en) 2006-08-24 2014-01-01 Creator Technology Bv Permeation barrier on flexible device
JP2008060376A (en) 2006-08-31 2008-03-13 Optrex Corp Jig for manufacturing cof substrate
KR100769425B1 (en) * 2006-09-21 2007-10-22 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Organic light-emitting display device
CN101518168B (en) 2006-09-22 2011-12-07 日本写真印刷株式会社 Housing case, method for manufacturing the housing case and glass insert forming die used in the method
KR100872095B1 (en) 2006-12-19 2008-12-05 삼성중공업 주식회사 Apparatus for loading and unloading of automated device
KR101310757B1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2013-09-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal
TWI456294B (en) 2007-04-09 2014-10-11 Dexerials Corp Image display device
JP2009186957A (en) 2007-04-09 2009-08-20 Sony Chemical & Information Device Corp Resin composition and display device
JP4997594B2 (en) * 2007-05-17 2012-08-08 Nltテクノロジー株式会社 Liquid crystal display
JP4471022B2 (en) * 2007-06-27 2010-06-02 エプソンイメージングデバイス株式会社 Electro-optical device substrate and electronic apparatus
US7760289B2 (en) 2007-06-27 2010-07-20 Epson Imaging Devices Corporation Electro-optic device, method of manufacturing electro-optic device and electronic equipment
JP5094250B2 (en) 2007-07-10 2012-12-12 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイイースト Display device
JP4469006B2 (en) * 2007-09-25 2010-05-26 キヤノンアネルバ株式会社 Manufacturing method of display substrate
US20090088041A1 (en) 2007-09-25 2009-04-02 Canon Anelva Corporation Display substrate manufacturing method and vacuum processing apparatus
JP5213407B2 (en) 2007-10-10 2013-06-19 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイイースト Liquid crystal display device and organic EL display device
CN101306620B (en) 2008-01-02 2012-01-18 苏州康威机电有限公司 Regulating device for veneer egistration on veneer plate
KR100864407B1 (en) 2008-01-09 2008-10-20 (주)에이엠피테크놀로지 Resistive touch being coupled with mold structure and manufacturing method thereof
US8123894B2 (en) 2008-05-07 2012-02-28 Apple Inc. 3-dimensional curved substrate lamination
CN102119077A (en) 2008-08-13 2011-07-06 富士通株式会社 Film sticking device, film sticking method, and electronic paper manufacturing method
JP2010072502A (en) 2008-09-22 2010-04-02 Hitachi Displays Ltd Liquid crystal display device
KR20100041450A (en) 2008-10-14 2010-04-22 삼성전자주식회사 Touch screen pannel and fabrication method thereof
US20110199348A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2011-08-18 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and manufacturing method thereof
TW201017499A (en) * 2008-10-27 2010-05-01 Tpk Touch Solutions Inc Manufacturing method and structure of curved-surface capacitive touch panel
WO2010101961A2 (en) 2009-03-02 2010-09-10 Apple Inc. Techniques for strengthening glass covers for portable electronic devices
US20100253902A1 (en) * 2009-04-07 2010-10-07 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and manufacturing method thereof
US20100284132A1 (en) * 2009-05-08 2010-11-11 Taiwan Green Point Enterprises Co., Ltd. Touch panel module and method of making the same
KR101084152B1 (en) * 2009-07-23 2011-11-17 엘지전자 주식회사 Display device
CN101996535A (en) 2009-08-25 2011-03-30 精工爱普生株式会社 Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus
TWI433071B (en) 2009-09-22 2014-04-01 Ind Tech Res Inst 3-d curved display device, fabrication method thereof and plastic display panel
KR101319129B1 (en) * 2009-11-04 2013-10-17 코니카 미놀타 어드밴스드 레이어즈 인코포레이티드 Drive mechanism and imaging device using the same
CN201811892U (en) * 2009-12-10 2011-04-27 深圳市欧帝光学有限公司 Device for testing nose bridge fitting of TiNi shape memory alloy glasses
US20110261002A1 (en) 2010-04-27 2011-10-27 Microsoft Corporation Displaying images on solid surfaces
WO2011148990A1 (en) * 2010-05-26 2011-12-01 旭硝子株式会社 Transparent surface material having adhesive layer, display device, and manufacturing method for same
KR101694886B1 (en) 2010-06-16 2017-01-24 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Image display apparatus and organic light emitting display apparatus comprising image shift unit
US20120051067A1 (en) * 2010-08-24 2012-03-01 Key Plastics L.L.C. Lighting display and method of manufacturing same
KR101886801B1 (en) 2010-09-14 2018-08-10 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 flat panel display integrated touch screen panel
KR101211371B1 (en) 2010-09-16 2012-12-13 주식회사 토비스 Method for manufacturing display panel with curved shape
TWI457880B (en) * 2010-09-30 2014-10-21 E Ink Holdings Inc Curved display module and display device
KR101319409B1 (en) 2010-10-20 2013-10-18 이기홍 The manufacture-method and apparatus of curvature-style touch screen galss
KR20120044501A (en) * 2010-10-28 2012-05-08 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Display device having a touch screen panel and manufacturing method of the same
US8808483B2 (en) * 2010-11-05 2014-08-19 Apple Inc. Method of making a curved touch panel
TWI408445B (en) 2010-11-17 2013-09-11 Hannstar Display Corp Touch screen display apparatus and cover lens and assembling method thereof
US10781135B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2020-09-22 Apple Inc. Strengthening variable thickness glass
US9866660B2 (en) * 2011-03-21 2018-01-09 Apple Inc. Electronic devices with concave displays
US20120275024A1 (en) 2011-04-27 2012-11-01 Rockwell Collins, Inc. Polarizer assembly with adhesive layers
KR101320384B1 (en) * 2011-06-30 2013-10-23 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Flexible display panel and the display apparatus comprising the flexible display panel
US10061356B2 (en) * 2011-06-30 2018-08-28 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Flexible display panel and display apparatus including the flexible display panel
KR20130015230A (en) 2011-08-02 2013-02-13 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and method for manufacturing the same
US8929085B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2015-01-06 Apple Inc. Flexible electronic devices
US8773848B2 (en) 2012-01-25 2014-07-08 Apple Inc. Fused glass device housings
KR20140002470A (en) 2012-06-29 2014-01-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device, manufacturing method of the same and manufacturing device of the same
US9439315B2 (en) 2012-06-29 2016-09-06 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
KR20140046839A (en) 2012-10-11 2014-04-21 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Flexible display device
JP6136527B2 (en) 2012-10-29 2017-05-31 大日本印刷株式会社 Optical laminate for front surface of in-cell touch panel liquid crystal element and in-cell touch panel type liquid crystal display device using the same
KR101973778B1 (en) 2012-11-16 2019-04-30 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Flexible display device and method of manufacturing cover window of the same
KR101975490B1 (en) 2013-02-18 2019-05-08 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Cover window and display device with the cover window

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN103531103B (en) 2018-09-25
CN106626719A (en) 2017-05-10
TWI590439B (en) 2017-07-01
TWI779317B (en) 2022-10-01
US20160021764A1 (en) 2016-01-21
KR20140010919A (en) 2014-01-27
KR102147842B1 (en) 2020-08-26
US20230095460A1 (en) 2023-03-30
US20150321442A1 (en) 2015-11-12
KR20140002470A (en) 2014-01-08
CN203415180U (en) 2014-01-29
CN108172119A (en) 2018-06-15
US10194538B2 (en) 2019-01-29
TW201442228A (en) 2014-11-01
EP2679388B1 (en) 2017-12-06
CN203983240U (en) 2014-12-03
EP2679388A1 (en) 2014-01-01
TWI596761B (en) 2017-08-21
US20140002975A1 (en) 2014-01-02
US11627670B2 (en) 2023-04-11
TW202042388A (en) 2020-11-16
EP3296108A1 (en) 2018-03-21
CN104123890A (en) 2014-10-29
CN104123890B (en) 2018-05-01
EP3050704B1 (en) 2020-10-07
TWI702720B (en) 2020-08-21
KR101849656B1 (en) 2018-04-18
EP3296108B1 (en) 2020-05-06
US20230247777A1 (en) 2023-08-03
CN106626719B (en) 2020-03-17
US11523522B2 (en) 2022-12-06
CN103531103A (en) 2014-01-22
TW201405802A (en) 2014-02-01
CN108172119B (en) 2020-11-10
TW201725717A (en) 2017-07-16
EP3050704A1 (en) 2016-08-03
KR20140002491A (en) 2014-01-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230247776A1 (en) Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US11564321B2 (en) Display device, and method and apparatus for manufacturing the same
US10315400B2 (en) Laminating device and laminating method using the same
US10137672B2 (en) Lamination device and method
KR101973779B1 (en) Method and device of manufacturing flexible display device
KR102117613B1 (en) Lamination apparatus and method for lamination
US10234602B2 (en) Organic light-emitting display apparatus
KR101690146B1 (en) Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing thereof
US10456939B2 (en) Cell cutting device for display devices
KR102096046B1 (en) Display deivce and manufacturing method of the same
KR20160006334A (en) Manufacturing apparatus for a display apparatus and manufacturing method for the same
KR20080090945A (en) Organic light emitting display apparatus
KR102241849B1 (en) Apparatus for manufacturing display apparatus and method of manufacturing display apparatus
KR20150019144A (en) Window removing apparatus
KR20210025763A (en) Apparatus and method for manufacturing a display apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: SAMSUNG DISPLAY CO., LTD., KOREA, REPUBLIC OF

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LEE, KYUNG-SU;HAN, KWAN-YOUNG;KIM, JONG-HWAN;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:063376/0362

Effective date: 20131007

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION